Panasonic FP-E Programming Manual Download Page 239

Page: 239 / 1334

Basic Instructions

−

129

Outline

This changes the operation mode of the high

−

speed counter based on

the contents specified by the character constant.

Program example

Ladder Diagram

Boolean Non-ladder

Ladder Diagram

Address

Instruction

Trigger

No. 2

keyword

No. 1

keyword

SYS1, M

HSC1,UP

SYS1

HSC1,UP

Character constant “M”

Operands

Operand

Relay

Timer/Counter

Register

Index

register

Constant

Index

modifier

Operand

WX WY WR WL

DT LD

modifier

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A N/A

N/A

Explanation of example

When R0 turns on, the operation mode of the high

−

speed counter CH0 is set to the addition mode.

Description

This changes the operation mode of the high

−

speed counter specified by No.1 keyword to the operation

mode specified by No.2 keyword.

Keyword setting

SYS1, M

HSC1,UP

High

−

speed counter setting

HSCn

n: 0 to 9, A, B with FP

−

X Ry type

n: 0 to 7 with FP

−

X Tr type

n: 0, 1, 2, 3 with FP

n: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 with FP0R

UP: Addition input setting
DOWN: Subtraction input setting

/FP

−

X/FP0R

SYS1

Availability

32k

−

X Ver 1.10 or more

FP0R

Change high

−

speed counter

operation mode

A: Available

N/A: Not Available

Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 888.723.4773 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: [email protected]

Summary of Contents for FP-E

Page 1: ...Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 2: ...Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 3: ...e Relays P 1 39 1 2 11 Error Alarm Relays E 1 41 1 3 Explanation of Memory Areas 1 44 1 3 1 Data Register DT 1 44 1 3 2 Special Data Registers DT 1 46 1 3 3 File Registers FL 1 48 1 3 4 WX WY WR and WL 1 49 1 3 5 Link Data Registers LD for FPΣ FP X FP0R 1 50 1 3 6 Link Data Registers LD for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 1 52 1 3 7 Set Value Area for Timer Counter SV 1 56 1 3 8 Elapsed Value Area for Timer Coun...

Page 4: ...el Instruction Numbers and Program Input 3 4 3 1 3 High level Instruction and Execution Condition Trigger 3 5 3 1 4 F and P Type High level Instructions 3 6 Chapter 4 Precautions Concerning Programs 4 1 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 4 3 4 1 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in the Program 4 3 4 1 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area 4 5 4 2 Use of Duplicated Output...

Page 5: ...pendix 5 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 5 3 5 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP0 5 5 5 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0 5 15 5 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0 5 18 5 1 4 Table of System Registers for FP e 5 28 5 1 5 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP e 5 32 5 1 6 Table of Special Data Registers for FP e 5 36 5 1 7 Table of System R...

Page 6: ...asic Instructions 5 201 5 3 Table of High level Instructions 5 209 5 4 Table of Error codes 5 229 5 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 5 242 5 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 5 243 5 7 ASCII Codes 5 244 Record of changes R 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 7: ...n 2 35 Basic function instructions TML On delay timer TML 2 36 TMR On delay timer TMR 2 42 TMX On delay timer TMX 2 42 TMY On delay timer TMY 2 42 CT Counter 2 48 SR Shift register 2 54 Control instructions MC Master control relay 2 57 MCE Master control relay end 2 57 JP Jump 2 61 LBL Label 2 61 2 64 LOOP Loop 2 64 BRK Break 2 68 ED End 2 70 CNDE Conditional end 2 71 EJECT Eject 2 73 Step ladder ...

Page 8: ...STF Floating point real number data comparison Start 2 140 STF Floating point real number data comparison Start 2 140 STF Floating point real number data comparison Start 2 140 STF Floating point real number data comparison Start 2 140 AN 16 bit data compare AND 2 142 AN 16 bit data compare AND 2 142 AN 16 bit data compare AND 2 142 AN 16 bit data compare AND 2 142 AN 16 bit data compare AND 2 142...

Page 9: ...a compare OR 2 150 ORD 32 bit data compare OR 2 150 ORD 32 bit data compare OR 2 150 ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR 2 152 ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR 2 152 ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR 2 152 ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR 2 152 ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR 2 152 ORF Floating point real number data...

Page 10: ...bit data move 3 27 P8 PDMV2 F10 BKMV Block move 3 29 P10 PBKMV F11 COPY Block copy 3 31 P11 PCOPY F12 ICRD Data read from EEPROM 3 33 Data read from F ROM 3 35 F12 ICRD Data read from IC card 3 37 P12 PICRD P13 PICWT Data write to EEPROM 3 39 Data write to F ROM 3 41 F13 ICWT Data write to IC card 3 43 P13 PICWT F14 PGRD Program read from IC card 3 45 P14 PPGRD F15 XCH 16 bit data exchange 3 49 P1...

Page 11: ...PD F30 16 bit data multiplication 3 75 P30 P F31 D 32 bit data multiplication 3 77 P31 PD F32 16 bit data division 3 79 P32 P F33 D 32 bit data division 3 81 P33 PD F34 W 16 bit data multiplication result in 16 bits 3 83 P34 P W F35 1 16 bit data increment 3 85 P35 P 1 F36 D 1 32 bit data increment 3 87 P36 PD 1 F37 1 16 bit data decrement 3 89 P37 P 1 F38 D 1 32 bit data decrement 3 91 P38 PD 1 F...

Page 12: ...ision 3 115 P52 PB F53 DB 8 digit BCD data division 3 117 P53 PDB F55 B 1 4 digit BCD data increment 3 119 P55 PB 1 F56 DB 1 8 digit BCD data increment 3 121 P56 PDB 1 F57 B 1 4 digit BCD data decrement 3 123 P57 PB 1 F58 DB 1 8 digit BCD data decrement 3 125 P58 PDB 1 Data compare instructions F60 CMP 16 bit data comparison 3 127 P60 PCMP F61 DCMP 32 bit data comparison 3 131 P61 PDCMP F62 WIN 16...

Page 13: ...A F76 ABIN ASCII code 16 bit binary data 3 177 P76 PABIN F77 DBIA 32 bit binary data ASCII code 3 180 P77 PDBIA F78 DABI ASCII code 32 bit binary data 3 183 P78 PDABI F80 BCD 16 bit binary data 4 digit BCD data 3 186 P80 PBCD F81 BIN 4 digit BCD data 16 bit binary data 3 188 P81 PBIN F82 DBCD 32 bit binary data 8 digit BCD data 3 190 P82 PDBCD F83 DBIN 8 digit BCD data 32 bit binary data 3 192 P83...

Page 14: ...101 SHL Left shift of multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data 3 232 P101 PSHL F102 DSHR Right shift of n bits in a 32 bit data 3 234 P102 PDSHR F103 DSHL Left shift of n bits in a 32 bit data 3 236 P103 PDSHL F105 BSR Right shift of one hexadecimal digit 4 bits 3 238 P105 PBSR F106 BSL Left shift of one hexadecimal digit 4 bits 3 240 P106 PBSL F108 BITR Right shift of multiple bits of 16 bit data ra...

Page 15: ...ata right rotation with carry flag data 3 278 P122 PRCR F123 RCL 16 bit data left rotation with carry flag data 3 280 P123 PRCL F125 DROR 32 bit data right rotation 3 282 P125 PDROR F126 DROL 32 bit data left rotation 3 284 P126 PDROL F127 DRCR 32 bit data right rotation with carry flag data 3 286 P127 PDRCR F128 DRCL 32 bit data left rotation with carry flag data 3 288 P128 PDRCL Bit manipulation...

Page 16: ...P2SH FP10SH 3 325 F145 SEND Data send For MEWTOCOL master mode 3 335 P145 PSEND Data send For MODBUS master MODBUS masterⅡ mode 3 339 Data send MEWNET link 3 350 F146 RECV Data receive For MEWTOCOL master mode 3 360 P146 PRECV Data receive For MODBUS master MODBUS masterⅡ mode 3 364 Data receive MEWNET link 3 376 F147 PR Printout 3 386 F148 ERR Self diagnostic error set 3 390 P148 PERR F149 MSG Me...

Page 17: ... channel specification F167 HC1R Target value match off High speed counter control 3 473 F167 HC1R Target value match off Pulse output control 3 476 F168 SPD1 Positioning control trapezoidal control 3 479 Positioning control home position return 3 483 F169 PLS Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation 3 488 F170 PWM PWM output with channel specification 3 491 F171 SPDH Pulse output wit...

Page 18: ... MV3 Three 16 bit data move 3 575 P190 PMV3 F191 DMV3 Three 32 bit data move 3 577 P191 PDMV3 Logic operation instructions F215 DAND 32 bit data AND 3 579 P215 PDAND F216 DOR 32 bit data OR 3 581 P216 PDOR F217 DXOR 32 bit data XOR 3 583 P217 PDXOR F218 DXNR 32 bit data XNR 3 585 P218 PDXNR F219 DUNI 32 bit data unites 3 587 P219 PDUNI F230 TMSEC Time data Second conversion 3 589 P230 PTMSEC F231 ...

Page 19: ... data from character strings left side 3 627 P262 PLEFT F263 MIDR Retrieving a character string from a character string 3 629 P263 PMIDR F264 MIDW Writing a character string to a character string 3 631 P264 PMIDW F265 SREP Replacing character strings 3 633 P265 PSREP Integer type data processing instructions F270 MAX Maximum value search in 16 bit data table 3 635 P270 PMAX F271 DMAX Maximum value...

Page 20: ...F290 DZONE 32 bit data zone control 3 667 P290 PDZONE BCD type real number operation instructions F300 BSIN BCD type Sine operation 3 669 P300 PBSIN F301 BCOS BCD type Cosine operation 3 671 P301 PBCOS F302 BTAN BCD type Tangent operation 3 673 P302 PBTAN F303 BASIN BCD type Arcsine operation 3 675 P303 PBASIN F304 BACOS BCD type Arccosine operation 3 677 P304 PBACOS F305 BATAN BCD type Arctangent...

Page 21: ...int real number data 16 bit integer data largest P327 PINT integer not exceeding the floating point real number data 3 717 F328 DINT Floating point real number data 32 bit integer data largest P328 PDINT integer not exceeding the floating point real number data 3 719 F329 FIX Floating point real number data 16 bit integer data P329 PFIX rounding the first decimal point down to integer 3 721 F330 D...

Page 22: ... P349 PFZONE F350 FMAX Maximum value search in floating point real number data P350 PFMAX table 3 751 F351 FMIN Minimum value search in floating point real number data P351 PFMIN table 3 753 F352 FMEAN Total and mean numbers calculation in floating point real P352 PFMEAN number data table 3 755 F353 FSORT Sort data in real number floating point data table 3 757 P353 PFSORT F354 FSCAL Scaling of re...

Page 23: ... bank processing instructions F414 SBFL Setting the file register bank number 3 785 P414 PSBFL F415 CBFL Changing the file register bank number 3 786 P415 PCBFL F416 PBFL Restoring the file register bank number 3 787 P416 PPBFL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 24: ...Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 25: ...Chapter 1 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 26: ...for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register Note 2 DT 1 660 words DT0 to DT1659 6 144 words DT0 to DT6143 16 384 words DT0 to DT16383 Data memory used in program Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Timer Counter set value area Note 2 SV 144 words SV0 to SV143 Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and an initial value of a count er Stores by ti...

Page 27: ...d type that resets them For the FP0 T32C the selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register These areas can be spcified as hold type or non hold type by setting system register For the FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 that area is fixed and allotted the numbers as shown below Hold type and Non hold type areas Item C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Timer Non hold type All points...

Page 28: ...s as one word 16 bits of data External output relay see note 3 13 words WY0 WY12 QW0 QW12 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay see note 2 63 words WR0 WR62 MW0 0 MW0 62 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data words Data register see note 2 1660 words DT0 DT1659 MW5 0 MW5 1659 Data memory used in a program Data is ...

Page 29: ... value during operation of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number Me Special data register 56 double words DDT9000 DDT9110 MD5 9000 MD5 9110 Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored Index register 1 double words DI0 MD6 0 Used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Item Number of points oint Master control relay points MCR 32 points tio...

Page 30: ...cannot be specified with FPWIN GR Hold type and non hold type areas 1 Model AFPE224300 Standard type AFPE224305 Calendar timer type AFPE214325 Thermocouple input type Timer Non hold type all points Counter Non hold type From the set value to C139 Hold type C140 to C143 EV140 to EV143 elapsed value yp SV non hold 2 SV hold Internal relay Non hold type 976 points R0 to R60F 61 words WR0 to WR60 e ay...

Page 31: ... words WY0 to WY109 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay WR Note2 256 words WR0 to WR255 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Link relay WL 128 words WL0 to WL127 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register DT Note2 12315 words DT0 to DT12314 32765 words DT0 to DT32764 Dat...

Page 32: ...494 10 38 to F3 402823 1038 Notes 1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 2 There are two types one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the mode is changed to PROG mode from RUN mode and the other is the non hold type...

Page 33: ...r see notes 2 and 3 1024 C1008 C1023 T0 T1007 Goes on when the counter increments Corresponds to the counter number Special internal relay 176 R9000 R910F Turns on or off based on specific conditions Used as a flag External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM 32 words WX0 WX31 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T...

Page 34: ...00 stages Cont ructio Number of subroutines 100 subroutines C instru Number of interrupt programs 9 programs 8 external input points X0 to X7 1 periodical interrupt point 0 5 ms to 30s Item Range available for use Item Range available for use Decimal constants i t t K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation t integer type K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation stant Hexadecimal t t H0 to HF...

Page 35: ... 1 WY 74 words WY0 to WY73 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay see note 2 WR 256 words WR0 to WR255 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Link relay WL 128 words WL0 to WL127 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register see note 2 DT 32765 words DT0 to DT32764 Data memory u...

Page 36: ... 1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 2 If no battery is ued only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R2480 to R255F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the op...

Page 37: ...rds WY0 to WY109 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay WR Note2 256 words WR0 to WR255 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Link relay WL 128 words WL0 to WL127 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register DT Note2 12285 words DT0 to DT12284 32765 words DT0 to DT32764 Data m...

Page 38: ...ove is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R2470 to R255F data registers 55 words C14 DT12230 to DT12284 C30 C60 DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the op...

Page 39: ... external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay WR 253 words WR0 to WR252 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Link relay WL 128 words WL0 to WL127 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register Note 1 DT 6 000 words DT0 to DT5999 Data memory used in program Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Link data...

Page 40: ...n Floating point type f f 1 175494 10 38 to f 3 402823 1038 f1 175494 10 38 to f3 402823 1038 Notes 1 There are two unit types the hold type that saves the conditions that exist just before turning the power off or changing from the RUN mode to PROG mode and the non hold type that resets them The selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register 2 The points...

Page 41: ...n or off based on spe cific conditions and is used as a flag Memory area External input relay WX 512 words WX0 to WX511 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External output relay WY 512 words WY0 to WY511 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay WR 887 words WR0 to WR886 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points...

Page 42: ...rom 0 5ms to 1 5s For FP2 C3P 1st program only Constant Decimal constants K K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation constants K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal constants H H0 to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants H0 to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Floating point type f f 1 175494 10 38 to f 3 402823 1038 f1 175494 10 38 to f3 402823 1038 Notes 1 There are two unit typ...

Page 43: ...onditions and is used as a flag Memory area External input relay WX 512 words WX0 to WX511 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External output relay WY 512 words WY0 to WY511 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay WR 887 words WR0 to WR886 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data ...

Page 44: ...nly be used for the 1st program Number of interrupt program 25 program can only be used for the 1st program Constant Decimal t t K K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation constants K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal constants H H0 to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants H0 to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Floating point type f f 1 175494 10 38 to f 3 402823 1038 f1 175494...

Page 45: ...lay X X0 X1 XF X10 X11 X1F X20 X21 X2F Timers T and Counters C The addresses for timer contacts T and counter contacts C are correspond to the timer and counter instruction numbers and expressed in decimals as shown below Example FP2 0 1 2 Decimal number T0 T1 T999 C1000 C1001 C1023 Note Counters and timers share the same area The division of the area can be changed with system register 5 The tabl...

Page 46: ...d by the combination of units and boards used For details about the I O allocation refer to Hardware Manual of each PLC Example FP2 0 1 2 3 4 Slot No Y10 to Y1F X0 to XF Power supply unit CPU 16 point type input unit 16 point type output unit The 16 points external input relays X0 through XF are allotted for the 16 point type input unit for slot 0 and the 16 points external output relays Y10 throu...

Page 47: ...Y points 16 internal relay R points and 16 link relay L points Example Word external input relay WX Each relay is composed of 16 external input relay X points as shown below XFXE XDXCXBXAX9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 WX0 X1F X1E X1D X12 X11 X10 WX1 When the state of an external input relay X changes the content of WX also changes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info cl...

Page 48: ...photoelectric sensor Input on Input unit X Y Input X contact on Program CPU Usage restrictions The addresses for inputs which do not actually exist cannot be used The on or off status of the external input relays cannot be changed by the program in the programmable controller There are no restrictions on the number of times one external input relay is programmed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773...

Page 49: ...re not actually allocated can be used in the same way as internal relays However they cannot be specified as hold types When used as contacts there are no restrictions on the number of times that can be used As a rule when specified as the output destination for operation results of OT and KP instructions use is limited to once in a program to inhibit double output Note You can permit duplicated u...

Page 50: ...to inhibit double output Note You can permit duplicated use of an output by changing the system register 20 setting Even if the same relay is used as an operand for instructions such as SET and RST it is not regarded as duplicated use of outputs For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode all of the internal relays R go off I...

Page 51: ... specify whether a hold type or a non hold type is used If the beginning of a hold type relay is specified using a word number relays before that point will be non hold types and subsequent relays will be hold types Value of system register 7 initial number of hold type Non hold type Hold type Default settings for hold types and non hold types Type Non hold type Hold type FP10SH FP2SH R0 to R499F ...

Page 52: ...uction R900A to R900C High speed counter control flag R903A to R903D and others Error flags Turns on when an error occurs Operation error R9007 R9008 Shared memory access error R9031 and others Relays which turn on and off under special conditions The required conditions can be selected in the program and the relays used accordingly Always on relay R9010 Clock pulse relay R9018 to R901E and others...

Page 53: ... contact that have the same number Send area Send Receive MEWNET W0 Communication Cassette Receive area on Ln on Ln When link relays are used bit information can be exchanged in this way between PLCs Available range of link relays The available range of link relays varies depending on the type of network and the combination of units The available range and number of points must be specified separa...

Page 54: ...register 10 L0 to L9F will be non hold types and L100 to L63F will be hold types For the default value all link relays are hold types If used as link relays for reception be aware that no holding operation is carried out even if the link relays are specified as hold types using the system registers Usage restrictions When used as contacts there are no restrictions on the number of times that can b...

Page 55: ...stem for FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH for wire cables MEWNET P link system for FP10SH for fiber optic cables If calculation results are output to the link relay coil of a certain PLC the results are also sent to other PLC connected with MEWNET and will be reflected in link relay contact that have the same number Link station Send area Send Link station Receive MEWNET Link unit Receive area on Ln on Ln CPU...

Page 56: ...2 settings menu With the FP2SH the range between L0 and L639F can be specified When used with MEWNET W the range between L0 and L127F cannot be used With the FP2 the range between L0 and L127F can be specified Also the internal relay can be used in place of the link relay by setting the MEWNET W2 setting menu However when used with MEWNET W the range between L0 and L127F cannot be used with MEWNET...

Page 57: ...640 to L127F 11 L1280 to L639F 16 If the beginning of a hold type relay is specified using a word number relays before that point will be non hold types and subsequent relays will be hold types For example if 10 is set for system register 10 L0 to L9F will be non hold types and L100 to L63F will be hold types For the default value all link relays are hold types If used as link relays for reception...

Page 58: ...must be allocated when the network is configured before programming is done The method by which allocations are made varies depending on the type of network Refer to the manual for the pertinent link unit For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode all of the link relays L go off If a hold type has been specified see next pag...

Page 59: ... up Usage restrictions When used as contacts there are no restrictions on the number of times that can be used For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode the timer contact goes off If a hold type has been specified it goes off as well Note With the FP2SH FP10SH system register 4 can be set in such a way that the timer contac...

Page 60: ...n Counter number Count up Usage restrictions When used as contacts there are no resrictions on the number of times that can be used For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode the counter contact goes off If a hold type has been specified it goes off as well Note With the FP2SH FP10SH system register 4 can be set in such a wa...

Page 61: ...pe partitioning The contents of timer contacts counter contacts set value areas and elapsed value areas can be held when the power is turned off or the mode switched from RUN to PROG and operation later resumed based on those contents In the case of the FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 and FP e without clock calendar function the areas which hold their contents when the power is turned off are fixed as shown b...

Page 62: ...lease keep the default value Otherwise we cannot guarantee the function of hold non hold value 1 Use the following methods for holding the SV data Set the transfer instruction for the data register DT to hold the data Then perform the setting so that the data can be transferred from DT to SV after the RUN mode starts Use the FP e model with a battery For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH contacts of timers and...

Page 63: ...elay only goes on when a leading edge start instruction OT or a trailing edge start instruction OT is executed When used as the trigger a pulse relay only operates during one scan when leading edge or trailing edge is detected Example 1 Differential execution when input X0 rises X0 P0 P0 Y10 X0 P0 Y10 One scan Example 2 Differential execution when input X1 falls X1 P1 P1 Y11 X1 P1 Y11 One scan Pho...

Page 64: ... OT instruction double output is prohibited There is no limitation to the number of times a pulse relay can used as a contact A pulse relay cannot be specified as an output destination for an OT KP SET RST or ALT instruction A word unit pulse relay WP cannot be specified as a storage location for a high level instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 65: ...i f fi t l t DT90421 Day time data Data of calendar timer for first relay to go on DT90422 Year month data on Information for up to 500 error alarm relays can be stored in the memory area Those which can be monitored or operated by the user however are those in the range from DT90401 to DT90419 only Usage restrictions and precautions Error alarm relay E cannot be specified as the output destinatio...

Page 66: ...when an error is corrected X1 E12 Reset E12 R X1 on K 4 K21 K12 K 5 K 0 K 0 K 3 K21 K 5 K 0 K 0 DT90400 1 DT90401 DT90402 DT90403 DT90404 DT90405 No of error alarm relays which are on Relay numbers of error alarm relay which are on Clearing all buffer areas Either of the following methods may be used To reset all of the error alarm relays use the RST instruction in the same way as that described o...

Page 67: ...sible to user Range not visible to user K18 K19 K20 K21 K499 K500 DT90402 DT90403 DT90404 DT90417 DT90418 DT90419 Storage buffer 1 Storage buffer 2 Storage buffer 3 Storage buffer 4 Storage buffer 17 Storage buffer 18 Storage buffer 19 Storage buffer 20 Storage buffer 21 Storage buffer 499 Storage buffer 500 X1 DF R DT90401 K 2 K 3 K 4 K 5 K18 DT90401 Range visible to user Range not visible to use...

Page 68: ...1 0 8 0 7 0 0 4 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Example of a program which writes a numeric value to DTn F0 MV K0 DT n Decimal constant K or hexadecimal constant H When 32 bit double word data is handled in data registers use two data registers as a set The number of the data register for the lower 16 bits is specified higher 16 bit area lower 16 bit area DTn 1 DTn 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 69: ...ginning of a hold type data register is specified using a word number data registers before that point will be non hold types and subsequent data registers will be hold types Value of system register 8 initial number of hold type Non hold type Hold type Default settings for hold types and non hold types Type Non hold type Hold type FPΣ FP X C30 C60 DT0 to DT32709 32710 words DT32710 to DT32765 55 ...

Page 70: ...st three digits are the same D T 9 0 5 5 With the FP0 T32C FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH D T 9 0 0 5 5 With the FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 FP e The main functions of special data registers are Environmental settings and operation statuses The operation statuses of the programmable controller specified with the system registers and the various types of instructions are stored Link communication statu...

Page 71: ... directly using programming tools High performance counter These registers are used for reading and writing the target value and elapsed value of the high performance counters High performance counter elapsed target value area DT9044 to DT9051 DT90044 to DT90051 and DT9104 to DT9111 DT90104 to DT90111 For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize si...

Page 72: ...words see note FP2 16 K Max 14 333 words see note FP2SH 32 765 words 3 banks Note The number of words varies depending on the type and the system register settings Non hold type data and hold type data System register 9 can be used to specify whether hold types or non hold types of file registers are to be used For the default setting all file registers are hold types For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if t...

Page 73: ...mode WX WY WR and WL are cleared to 0 Even if a hold type has been specified these are cleared to 0 Pulse relays P and error alarm relays E cannot be handled in word units Examples of using WX WY WR and WL WX can be used to read in digital switch and keyboard inputs and WY can be used for output to 7 segment displays WR can also be used as a shift register All of the relays can be used to monitor ...

Page 74: ...PLCs connected through the network LDn Send LDn Receive MEWNET W0 Communication Cassette When link data registers are used data can be exchanged between PLCs simply by writing the data as shown here Available range of link data registers The available range of link data registers varies depending on the type of network and the combination of units The available range and number of points must be s...

Page 75: ...o specify whether the link data registers are the hold type or non hold type Range System register no LD0 to LD127 12 If the beginning of a hold type register is specified using a word number registers before that point will be non hold types and subsequent registers will be hold types For example if 64 is set for system register 12 LD0 to LD63 will be non hold types and LD64 to LD127 will be hold...

Page 76: ...SH for coaxial cables MEWNET W link system for FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH for wire cables MEWNET P link system for FP10SH for fiber optic cables When data is written to a link data register of one PLC the contents are stored in the link data registers that have the same numbers in other PLCs connected through the MEWNET Link station LDn Send Link station LDn Receive MEWNET CPU CPU When link data registe...

Page 77: ...ET W2 settings menu With the FP2SH the range between LD0 and LD8447 can be specified When used with MEWNET W the range between LD0 and LD255 cannot be used With the FP2 the range between LD0 and LD255 can be specified Also the data register can be used in place of the link relay by setting the MEWNET W2 setting menu However when used with MEWNET W the range between LD0 and LD255 cannot be used wit...

Page 78: ... hold type Range System register no LD0 to LD127 12 LD128 to LD255 13 LD256 to LD8447 17 If the beginning of a hold type register is specified using a word number registers before that point will be non hold types and subsequent registers will be hold types For example if 64 is set for system register 12 LD0 to LD63 will be non hold types and LD64 to LD127 will be hold types For the default value ...

Page 79: ... on the type of network Refer to the manual for the pertinent link unit For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode all of the link data registers LD are cleared to 0 Even if a hold type has been specified these link data registers are cleared to 0 Note With the FP2SH FP10SH system register 4 can be set in such a way that the...

Page 80: ... and changed from the program by specifying the destination and other information in F0 MV data transfer instruction The set value area can be read and rewritten using a programming tool For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mode all timer counter setting value areas SV are cleared to 0 Even if a hold type has been specified...

Page 81: ...e of a timer or counter in operation can be changed to prolong or shorten the operation The value in elapsed value area can be read and changed from the program by specifying the F0 MV data transfer instruction The elapsed value area can be read and rewritten using a programming tool For the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH if the Initialize Test switch is set to the upper side the Initialize side in the PROG mod...

Page 82: ...fication is possible only with regard to operands of high level instructions Modifying an address Address Base address Value in IX or IY K constant Example Modifying DT11 IXDT11 Base address IX value Target address 11 K0 DT11 11 K10 DT21 11 K 10 DT1 Modifying a constant Constant Base value Value in IX or IY Example 1 Modifying K100 IXK100 Base value IX value Constant K100 K0 K100 K100 K10 K110 K10...

Page 83: ...0 is written When the DT0 value is K10 K100 is written to WR10 IX WR0 WR10 K10 10 0 10 Example 2 Modifying a source address F0 MV DT 1 IX X0 F0 MV IXWR0 DT 0 IX setting The value of DT1 determines the WR address for transferring a value to DT0 When the DT1 value is K9 the value in WR9 is transferred to DT0 IX WR0 WR9 K9 9 0 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr...

Page 84: ...ess resulting from modification is negative or a large number When modifying 32 bit constants IX is specified At this point IX and IY in combination are handled as 32 bit data Lower 16 bit area Higher 16 bit area Contents of IX Contents of IY The results of modification will be 32 bit data Note For detailed information about the procedures for using index registers section 4 5 Phone 800 894 0412 F...

Page 85: ...ing from modification is negative or a large number When a 32 bit constant is modified the specified index register number and the following index register number are used in combination to handle the data as a 32 bit data Lower 16 bit area Higher 16 bit area Contents of In Contents of In 1 The results of modification will be 32 bit data Note When 32 bit constants are being modified ID should not ...

Page 86: ...he result of address modification overflows the memory area an operation error will result When the address resulting from modification is negative or a large number When a 32 bit constant is modified the specified index register number and the following index register number are used in combination to handle the data as a 32 bit data Lower 16 bit area Higher 16 bit area Contents of In Contents of...

Page 87: ... AN AN OR OR OT KP SET RST OT OT Instruction numbers specified with the following basic instructions TM CT MC MCE JP LOOP CALL FCAL FCAL instruction can be used with the FP2SH FP10SH Memory areas used with the following basic instructions TM CT SR Note There are some cases in which index modification cannot be specified depending on the instruction Confirm the table of Operands on the page describ...

Page 88: ... DT 0 I0 X0 F0 MV K100 I0DT100 I0 setting The value of DT0 determines the DT address where K100 is written When the DT0 value is K10 K100 is written to DT110 I0 DT100 DT110 K10 10 100 110 Example 2 Modifying a source address F0 MV DT 1 I0 X0 F0 MV I0DT100 DT 0 I0 setting The value of DT1 determines the DT address for transferring a value to DT0 When the DT1 value is K9 the value in DT109 is transf...

Page 89: ...0 Base value I0 value 16 bit constant K100 K0 K100 K100 K10 K110 K100 K 10 K90 Example 2 Modifying 16 bit constant H10 I0H10 Base value I0 value 16 bit constant H10 HA H1A H10 H10 H20 Example 3 Modifying 32 bit constant K0 I0K 0 Base value I1 and I0 value 32 bit constant K0 K10000 K10000 K0 K60000 K60000 K0 K999999 K999999 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr co...

Page 90: ...I0 R0 F35 1 DT100 I0 setting I0X0 The trigger of the F35 1 instruction is determined by the DT0 value When the value of DT0 is K10 the F35 1 instruction is executed when XA goes on I0 X0 XA K10 10 0 10 decimal A hexadecimal Example 2 Modifying an output destination F0 MV DT 2 I0 R0 I0 setting I0Y10 X0 The value of DT2 determines the output destination when X0 goes on When the value of DT0 is HF an...

Page 91: ... the value of DT0 is K10 K100 is written to WR10 I0 WR0 WR10 K10 10 0 10 Example 4 Modifying a source address F0 MV DT 1 IB X0 F0 MV IBWR0 DT 0 IB setting The value of DT1 determines the address of WR for transferring a value to DT0 When the value of DT1 is K9 the value in WR9 is transferred to DT0 IB WR0 WR9 K 9 9 0 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 92: ...s hexadecimal and the first digits are decimal Example For external input relay X Decimal 1 2 3 12 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 9 A B F X 0 X 1 X F X 10 X 11 X 1F X 20 X 21 X 2F Example using I0X0 Value of I0 Target address K H 0 0 X0 1 1 X1 9 9 X9 10 A XA 15 F XF 16 10 X10 31 1F X1F 159 9F X9F 160 A0 X100 161 A1 X101 255 FF X15F 256 100 X160 257 101 X161 265 10A X169 267 10B X16A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 88...

Page 93: ...Modifying JP1 JP I01 Label number specification with the Loop instruction Modifying LOOP5 LOOP I05 Subroutine program numbers Modifying CALL10 CALL I010 Note Timer numbers and counter numbers can be modified only when a memory area is specified for the set value TMXI0 0 SV0 Specification of set value area number Correct Modification cannot be done if the set value is specified with a constant TMXI...

Page 94: ...t point can be used as separate index registers from the I0 to ID index registers used prior to changing the bank The bank is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the leading address of the program The bank is also automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the leading address of a second program The bank numbers of index registers used in interrupt programs subroutines and other s...

Page 95: ... H 1 0 Different values can be set for I0 in bank 0 bank 1 and bank 2 The set values are only effective within their respective ranges Note For details on changing bank instruction refer to the explanations of F410 SETB F411 CHGB and F412 POPB instructions Example 2 Changing banks within an interrupt program END R9010 F411 CHGB H2 INT 0 R9010 F412 POPB IRET Main program Sub program Phone 800 894 0...

Page 96: ...ignificant Bit bit position 15 A 0 indicates a positive sign and a 1 indicates a negative sign The MSB Most Significant Bit is called the sign bit Example Decimal number 32 K32 Bit position 15 0 0 0 1211 0 8 0 7 0 1 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Binary data Example Decimal number 32 K 32 Bit position 15 1 1 1 1211 1 8 1 7 1 1 4 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Binary data Data is normally handled in units of one w...

Page 97: ...data for high level instructions Hexadecimal constants are also used to specify BCD data In the PLC the hexadecimal constant H is processed as binary BIN data in units of 16 bits as shown below Example Hexadecimal number 2A H2A Binary data Hexadecimal Bit position 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 1 0 1 0 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 2 1 Data is normally handled in units of one word 16 bits however it is also occa...

Page 98: ...ting point type real number operation instructions the area in which data converted to a real number is stored consists of two words 32 bits per data element As a result in transmission instructions such as that used to send real number data to a storage area and in other operations data should be moved in units of two words 32 bits Example 1 If DT0 is specified as the area in which floating point...

Page 99: ...a consists of 32 bit data It is specified using the symbol Example 1 Specifying the target operation data S for an integer device The contents of DT10 and DT20 are converted to real numbers and the operation is executed The results are stored in DT30 and DT31 as real number data F310 F DT10 DT20 DT30 Example 2 Specifying stored results D for an integer device The target operation data stored in DT...

Page 100: ...r and real number integer conversion instructions to convert values With this method a conversion instruction is used to convert integer data to real numbers When the integer data is 16 bit data F325 FLT is used When the integer data is 32 bit data F326 DFLT is used Real number data that has undergone real number operation processing is converted from real number data to integer data using the F32...

Page 101: ...eger data K1 If the real number data is 1 5 it is converted as integer data K 1 Example 3 When conversion is carried out by rounding off the digits to the right of the decimal point F331 ROFF DT0 DT10 converted to 16 bit integer F332 DROFF DT0 DT10 converted to 32 bit integer Digits to the right of the decimal point are rounded off If the real number data is 1 5 it is converted as integer data K2 ...

Page 102: ... and the result of the operation stored in DT20 and DT21 as real number data F312 f DT10 f0 5 DT20 4 Specifying a K constant for conversion The K constant 32 bit data is an integer data element so it is automatically converted to real number data and the operation is executed F310 F K10 DT50 DT60 Automatic conversion to real number 5 Specifying an H constant for conversion With an H constant 32 bi...

Page 103: ...erted to real numbers is stored consists of a three word area for each data element As a result in instructions such as that used to send real number data to a storage area and in other operations data should be moved in units of three words Example 1 If DT0 is specified as the area in which BCD type real number data is to be stored the data will be written to DT0 to DT2 F300 BSIN H45 D70 Operatio...

Page 104: ...wo instructions in which character constants can be specified F95 ASC instruction F257 to F265 SYS1 instruction and F149 MSG instruction The character constant M is stored in a specified memory area in the PLC as BIN data as shown below Example When character constant MEWNET is input 54 45 One word 4E 57 45 4D T E N W E M Character constant One word One word ASCII Hex code Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 8...

Page 105: ...FFF H0001 H0000 HFFFF H8000 32 bit data Data which can be handled in the PLC 32 bit binary data Decimal constants Hexadecimal constants 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 106: ...0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 384 8 192 4 096 2 048 1 024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 The data size is indicated by the other bits 1 024 512 256 64 8 4 1 868 Most significant bit 0 positive value A negative number is expressed as a two s complement the bits of the 16 bit binary data of the positive number are inverted and 1 is added to the result Example 2 Expressing the decimal number 4 0 0...

Page 107: ...H code H0 to H9999 32 bit 8 digit BCD H code H0 to H99999999 If any of the above ranges are exceeded when processing the corresponding data overflow or underflow will result BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and refers to expressing each digit of a decimal number by four binary digits Example When the decimal number is expressed in BCD Decimal number BCD code Binary coded decimal 0110 Eac...

Page 108: ...ts if over the maximum value K 32767 H 7FFF K 1 K 0 K 1 H 0001 H 0000 H FFFF K 32768 H 8000 K 2147483647 H 7FFFFFFF K 1 K 0 K 1 H 00000001 H 00000000 H FFFFFFFF H 80000000 Max value Min value Underflow results if under the minimum value Underflow results if under the minimum value Overflow and underflow during BCD operation If any of the following values are exceeded overflow or underflow will res...

Page 109: ... links with the min value Example 1 For K32767 K1 overflow The operation result is K 32768 and the carry flag turns on Example 2 For K 32768 K1 underflow The operation result is K32767 and the carry flag turns on 4 digit BCD code operation H 9999 H 0 Overflow Underflow Max value Min value The max value links with the min value Example 1 For H9999 H1 overflow The operation result is H0 and the carr...

Page 110: ...Relays Memory Areas and Constants 1 86 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 111: ...Chapter 2 Basic Instructions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 112: ...Basic Instructions 2 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 113: ...nd the relay which can be specified depends on the instruction Refer to the explanation of each instruction Example Read the status of external input X0 Start ST instruction Read the on or off status of the specified contact Outputs the operated result on and off to the external output Y10 Out OT instruction Output the operation result to the specified coil Example R0 R0 X0 ST X1 OR 0 1 Y10 R0 4 O...

Page 114: ...sary segments depending on the conditions Specify the section which will execute This is composed of several steps Master control relay A certain part of the program specified with MC or MCE is only executed when the appropriate condition is met Jump Skips execution of part of the program specified with JP or LBL when the appropriate condition is met This shortens program execution time Step ladde...

Page 115: ... interrupt program is executed 2 1 4 Data Compare Instructions This is a group of instructions which compare two data A contact is turned on or off based on the result of the comparison Each comparison instruction is composed of several steps Example Example of comparing the value of DT10 to K100 Y30 DT 10 K100 If the value of DT10 is less than K100 Y30 is turned on If the value of DT10 is greater...

Page 116: ... R R0 to R111F 1 2 y R R1120 or more 2 2 Special internal relay R R9000 to R910F 2 2 Link relay L L0 to L127F 1 2 y L L1280 to L639F 2 2 Timer T 0 to 255 1 2 Counter C 256 or more 2 2 Note Index modification is possible only with the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Basic function instructions Type of instruction Specified number Steps yp p Normal With index modification 0 001 s units timer TML 0 to 255 3 4 0...

Page 117: ...s Instructions Steps Instructions Normal specification With index modification JP 2 3 LOOP 4 5 CALL 2 3 FCAL 4 5 Note Index modification is possible only with the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Table of Basic Instructions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 118: ...P10SH 3 This can be used only with the FP2SH FP10SH 4 This can be used only with the FP0R FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Explanation of example Y10 goes on when X0 turns on Y11 goes on when X0 turns off on off X0 on off on off Y10 Y11 Description The ST instruction starts logic operations and regards the input contact specified at the start as a Form A normally open contact The ST instruction starts logic opera...

Page 119: ...from the bus line Y10 The OT instruction can be used consecutively Y10 X0 Y11 Y12 Some input devices such as emergency stop switches usually have a Form B normally closed contact When an emergency stop switch with a Form B contact is programmed be sure to use the ST instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 120: ...on 0 X0 Y10 Y11 Not 0 1 2 3 ST X 0 OT Y 10 OT Y 11 Explanation of example Y10 goes on and Y11 goes off when X0 turns on Y10 goes off and Y11 goes on when X0 turns off X0 Y10 Y11 on off on off on off Description The instruction inverts the operation result up to this instruction Not Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 121: ...FP2SH FP10SH 4 This can be used only with the FP0R FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Explanation of example Y10 goes on when both X0 and X1 turn on and also X2 turns off X0 X1 X2 Y10 on off on off on off on off Description Performs a logical AND operation with the results of the immediately preceding serially connected operation Precautions during programming Use the AN instruction when normally open contacts Form...

Page 122: ...ifier 4 OR OR A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This can be used only with the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 3 This can be used only with the FP2SH FP10SH 4 This can be used only with the FP0R FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Explanation of example Y10 goes on when either X0 or X1 turns on or X2 turns off X0 X1 X2 Y10 on off on off on off on off Description Performs a logical OR operation with the re...

Page 123: ...ntacts are connected in parallel Use the OR instruction when normally closed contacts Form B contacts are connected in parallel The OR instruction starts from the bus line The OR and OR instructions can be used consecutively X2 Y10 X0 X1 X3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 124: ...2 7 X3 Y12 X4 0 2 3 4 6 7 9 11 ST X 0 OT Y 10 ST X 1 AN Y 2 OT X 11 ST Y 3 OR X 4 OT Y 12 Operands Instruction Relay Timer Counter Contact Index modifier Instruction X Y R L P E T C modifier ST ST A A A A A N A A A N A AN AN A A A A A N A A A N A OR OR A A A A A N A A A N A ST ST AN AN OR OR Leading edge Start Leading edge AND Leading edge OR Trailing edge Start Trailing edge AND Trailing edge OR ...

Page 125: ...ne scan Leading edge on off on off Output to Y11 takes place for one scan only following a change in X2 from off to on when X1 is on X2 Y11 One scan on off on off X1 on off Output to Y12 takes place for one scan only following a change in X3 or X4 from on to off X4 Y12 One scan One scan on off on off X3 on off Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 126: ... Counter Contact Index modifier Instruction X Y R L P E T C modifier OT N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A A OT N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A A Explanation of example Output to pulse relay P0 takes place for one scan only following a change in X0 from off to on X0 P0 One scan on off on off Output to pulse relay P1 takes place for one scan only following a change in X1 from on to off X1 P1 One scan on o...

Page 127: ...t from on to off The pulse relay goes on for one scan only Precautions during programming When the pulse relay P which goes on for one scan only due to execution of a OT or OT instruction is used with a logic instruction ST AN or OR operation is the same as a normal contact followed by DF instruction Example using an OT instruction and the pulse relay P P0 X0 Y10 P0 Example using a DF instruction ...

Page 128: ... is held until an ALT instruction specifying that coil rises Flip flop control Precautions during programming During the interval that the input remains on the output only toggles when the rise occurs not after that When the mode is changed to RUN or the power is turned on in RUN mode such that the input is initially on toggling does not occur at the first scan When used with instructions which ch...

Page 129: ... X 0 OR X 1 ST X 2 OR X 3 ANS OT Y 10 Explanation of example Y10 goes on when X0 or X1 and X2 or X3 turn on block 1 block 2 X0 OR X1 AND X2 OR X3 Y10 X0 X1 X2 X3 Y10 on off on off on off on off on off Description Blocks connected in parallel are connected in series A block begins with the ST instruction ANS AND stack Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 130: ... blocks should be considered such as that shown below X0 Y10 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 block 5 block 4 block 1 block 2 block 3 ST X 0 OR X 1 ST X 2 OR X 3 ANS 1 ST X 4 OR X 5 ANS 2 OUT Y 10 block 1 block 2 block 3 block 4 block 5 1 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 131: ...0 AN X 1 ST X 2 AN X 3 ORS OT Y 10 Explanation of example Y10 goes on when both X0 and X1 or both X2 and X3 turn on X0 AND X1 OR X2 AND X3 Y10 block 1 block 2 X0 X1 X2 X3 Y10 on off on off on off on off on off Description Blocks connected in series are connected in parallel A block begins with the ST instruction ORS OR stack Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr ...

Page 132: ... blocks should be considered such as that shown below X0 Y10 X2 X1 X3 block 5 block 4 block 1 ST X 0 AN X 1 ST X 2 AN X 3 ORS 1 ST X 4 AN X 5 ORS 2 OUT Y 10 block 1 block 2 block 3 block 4 block 5 X4 X5 block 2 block 3 1 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 133: ... 1 OT Y 10 RDS AN X 2 OT Y 11 POPS AN X 3 OT Y 12 Explanation of example When X0 turns on Stores the operation result up to the PSHS instruction and Y10 goes on when X1 turns on Reads the stored result using the RDS instruction and Y11 goes on when X2 turns on Reads the stored result using the POPS instruction and Y12 goes on when X3 turns off Also clears the result stored by the PSHS instruction ...

Page 134: ...HS instruction and using this result continues operation from the next step Also clears the operation result stored by the PSHS instruction These instructions are used if there is branching from a single contact followed by another contact or contacts Precautions during programming You can continue to use the same operation result several times by repeatedly using the RDS instruction When you are ...

Page 135: ...e number of times be aware that the program will not run correctly 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Y10 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 ST X 0 PSHS AN X 1 PSHS AN X 2 PSHS AN X 3 PSHS AN X 4 PSHS AN X 5 PSHS AN X 6 OT Y10 2 3 4 5 6 This example shows the instruction used consecutively 6 times If a POPS instruction is used during repeated use of a PSHS instruction reading will take place in order beginning from the last data st...

Page 136: ...ST X 0 DF OT Y 10 ST X 1 DF OT Y 11 Explanation of example Y10 goes on for only one scan when the leading edge off on of X0 is detected Y11 goes on for only one scan when the trailing edge on off of X1 is detected X0 X1 1 scan Y10 Y11 Leading edge Trailing edge 1 scan 1 scan 1 scan on off on off on off on off Related instructions With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH the DFI instruction can ...

Page 137: ... obtained Example Leading edge differential DF instruction X0 Y10 RUN Leading edge DF instruction not executed on off on off Precautions during programming With a program such as the one in the figure below operation will be as follows 1 2 DF X0 Y10 X1 X0 X1 3 Y10 1 When X1 is off even if X0 rises Y10 remains off 2 Even if X1 rises when X0 is on Y10 remains off 3 If X0 rises when X1 is on then Y10...

Page 138: ...syntax is correct Operation is as follows with a circuit like the one shown below You cannot output from here X0 DF Y0 X1 X0 X1 Y0 Time chart Please use a program as follows when Y0 is turned on at the rise of either X0 or X1 X0 DF Y0 X1 X0 X1 Y0 DF Time chart Example of a differential instruction application Using a differential instruction makes it easier to adjust a program Application example ...

Page 139: ...fferential instruction can also be applied to an alternating circuit to hold and release the circuit using a single signal Example 1 R0 Y10 R0 Y10 X0 R0 Y10 DF Example 2 R0 Y10 Y10 Y10 R0 X0 R0 DF Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 140: ... X0 is met before RUN X0 Y10 One scan Description When the trigger execution condition changes from off to on the DFI instruction outputs differential output during the following scan only When the trigger execution condition is met before RUN is begun output differential output takes place at the first scan There is no limit to the number of times the DFI instruction can be used When the mode is ...

Page 141: ...must be exercised MC to MCE instructions JP to LBL instructions F19 SJP to LBL instructions LOOP to LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instructions Subroutine instructions Take care that the syntax is correct when combining a differential instruction with an ANS or POPS instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 142: ...Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT FL I K H M modifier RST N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A word device can be used only by FP2 FP2SH Explanation of example When X0 turns on Y30 goes on and holds on When X1 turns on Y30 goes off and stays off X0 X1 Y30 on off on off on off Description The SET instruction executes when the tri...

Page 143: ...ROG or when the power is turned off except when a hold type internal relay is specified as the output destination SET and RST instructions and differential instructions Be sure to place a DF instruction before the SET and RST instructions to make program development and refinement easier This is particularly effective when the same output destination is used in several places in the program X0 Y10...

Page 144: ...rns on output of the specified relay goes on and stays on Output relay goes off when the reset input turns on The output relay s on state is maintaineduntil a reset input turns on regardlessof the on or off states of the set input If the set input and reset input turn on simultaneously the reset input has priority Precautions during programming When the KP instruction is programmed between the MC ...

Page 145: ... When you want to move the addresses of one part of a program without changing the program insert a NOP instruction This is a convenient means of breaking a long program into several blocks Example To move the starting point of a program block from address 39 to address 40 insert a NOP instruction at address 39 Address 36 ST X0 OR X1 OT Y10 39 ST X2 40 AN X3 OT R20 ST R2 DF 44 ST X3 Address 36 ST ...

Page 146: ... be used with the FP2SH FP10SH Description The timer is reset and does not retain its data when the power is turned off or the mode is changed from RUN to PROG If you need to retain the operating state set system register 6 In that case a battery must be used Note The FP0 T32 is the type with a built in secondary battery When the trigger execution condition is on the set time decrements until the ...

Page 147: ...ing a timer instruction with an ANS or POPS instruction 1 1 Specifying the timer setting with a decimal constant K Timer operation when a decimal constant K is specified When a K constant is specified for the timer setting the memory area SV with the same number as the timer number is used as the setting value area 1 When the mode is changed to RUN or the power is turned on in RUN mode the timer s...

Page 148: ...n when a word memory area is specified A word memory area specified as a set value is used as a setting value area 1 When the execution condition X0 for a high level instruction goes on the setting value is set in the specified area this explanation uses DT0 as an example The following diagram uses the F0 MV instruction as an example F0 MV K30 DT0 X1 X0 T5 Y10 TML5 DT0 1 Transfer to set value area...

Page 149: ...alue will not begin until the next time the execution condition changes from off to on There are both word memory area which reset non hold type and do not reset hold type when the power is turned off or the mode changed from RUN to PROG If you need to retain the value written to a word memory area when the power is turned on a second time or after the mode is changed from RUN to PROG use a memory...

Page 150: ...ifferent index registers can be used for each Examples of timer instruction applications Serial connection of timer Ladder diagram Boolean Time chart T0 X0 Y10 T1 Y11 ST X 0 TMX 0 K 30 TML 1 K 200 ST T 0 OT Y 10 ST T 1 OT Y 11 X0 T0 T1 3s 0 2s Y10 Y11 TMX 0 K 30 on off on off on off on off on off TML 1 K 200 Parallel connection of timer Ladder diagram Boolean Time chart 0 2s Y10 Y11 T0 X0 TML 0 K ...

Page 151: ... on off on off on off on off F0 MV K 500 DT 0 F0 MV K 300 DT 0 TML 5 DT 0 Example of setting a set value from external digital switches The BCD data of the digital switches connected to X0 through XF is converted and becomes the set value T5 R11 TML 5 DT 1 Y30 ST R 10 F81 BIN WX 0 DT 1 ST R 11 TML 5 DT 1 ST T 5 OT Y 30 R10 F81 BIN WX 0 DT 1 CPU and input units 0 7 9 4 WX0 Digital switch Set value ...

Page 152: ...e FP0R 2 This can be used with the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 3 This can be used with the FP2SH FP10SH Description The timer is a non holdtype that is reset if the power is turned off or if the mode is changed from the RUN to the PROG mode If it is necessary to hold the operation state set system register 6 In that case a battery must be used Note The FP0 T32 is the type with a built in secondary battery Wh...

Page 153: ...on take care that the syntax is correct Timer operation The following is an example of setting the set value with a K constant For an explanation of operation when an set value area SV is specified see the following pages 1 When the mode is changed to RUN or when the power is turned on with the mode set to RUN the timer set value is transferred to the set value area SV with the same number TMX 5 K...

Page 154: ...olean Time chart T0 X0 TMX 1 K 20 Y10 T1 Y11 ST X 0 TMX 0 K 30 TMX 1 K 20 ST T 0 OT Y 10 ST T 1 OT Y 11 X0 T0 T1 3s 2s Y10 Y11 TMX 0 K 30 on off on off on off on off on off Parallel connection of timer Ladder diagram Boolean Time chart Y10 Y11 T0 X0 TMX 0 K 30 Y10 T1 Y11 ST X 0 PSHS TMX 0 K 30 POPS TMX 1 K 20 ST T 0 OT Y 10 ST T 1 OT Y 11 X0 T0 T1 TMX 1 K 20 3s 2s on off on off on off on off on of...

Page 155: ...he same Ladder diagram SV 5 Timer number Even if the value of the set value area SV is changed during decrement operation the decrement operation will continue from the value before the change Timer operation from the new value will not begin until decrement operation has ended or is interrupted and the trigger subsequently changes from off to on The set value area SV is normally a non hold type w...

Page 156: ...transferred from the set value area SV to the elapsed value area EV with the same number The same operation takes place if the mode is changed to RUN when the trigger is on 3 The value in the elapsed value area EV decrements if the trigger stays on every scan F0 MV K30 SV5 X1 X0 T5 Y10 TMX 5 SV 5 SV5 30 2 Transfers to EV area EV5 30 29 28 27 3 Decrement operation 4 When the value in the elapsed va...

Page 157: ... on off Example of setting a set value from external digital switches The BCD data of the digital switches connected to X0 through XF is converted and becomes the set value T5 R11 TMX 5 SV 5 Y30 ST R 10 F81 BIN WX 0 SV 5 ST R 11 TMX 5 SV 5 ST T 5 OT Y 30 R10 F81 BIN WX 0 SV 5 CPU and input units 0 7 9 4 WX0 Digital switch Set value of timer Connection example Ladder diagram Boolean With the FP2SH ...

Page 158: ... register Constant Index modifier Instruction WX 1 WY 1 WR 1 WL 1 SV EV 1 DT 1 LD 1 FL 3 IX IY K H modifier 2 Set value A A A A A A A A A N A N A A N A A 1 This can be used with the FP2SH FP10SH FP X V2 0 or more FPΣ V3 10 or more FP0R 2 This can be used with the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 3 This can be used with the FP2SH FP10SH Explanation of example When the leading edge of X0 is detected ten times count...

Page 159: ...etting the counting value The counting value can be set to a decimal constant K constant from K0 to K32767 Counter operation The following are examples of specifying a K constant as the set value For an explanation of operation when a set value area number is specified see following pages This example shows a case in which 100 is specified for the counter 1 When the mode is changed to RUN or the p...

Page 160: ...when the mode is changed to RUN or the power is turned on with the mode set to RUN decrement operation will not take place at the first scan Counter input Operation of instruction RUN Power on Counting Not counting When used in combination with instructions which change the order of instruction execution such as MC and MCE or JP and LBL see below the operation of the instruction may change dependi...

Page 161: ...0 2 When the count input X1 turns on decrement operation begins from the set value 30 Specify n the number of the set value area SV to be the same number as the counter Set value area number n Counter number Display CT 100 SV 100 These must be the same Even if the value in the set value area SV is changed during decrement operation the decrement operation will continue from the value before the ch...

Page 162: ...e reset input is off the value in the set value area SV is preset in the elapsed value area EV X1 C100 Y30 CT SV 100 100 X2 2 Presetting SV100 30 EV100 30 3 Each time the count input X1 turns on the value in the elapsed value area EV decrements X1 C100 Y30 CT SV 100 100 X2 SV100 30 EV100 30 29 28 27 3 Decrements 4 When the elapsed value area EV reaches zero the counter contact C with the same numb...

Page 163: ...V100 Example when X0 turns on Setting a set value from external digital switches The BCD data of the digital switches connected to X0 through XF is converted and becomes the set value Connection diagram Ladder diagram Boolean C100 X11 CT 100 SV 100 Y30 ST X 10 F81 BIN WX 0 SV 100 ST X 11 ST X 12 CT 100 SV 100 ST C 100 OT Y 30 X10 F81 BIN WX 0 SV 100 CPU and input units 0 7 9 4 Digital switch WX0 S...

Page 164: ...ifier D Data area N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A This can be used only with the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Explanation of example If the X1 turns on whenX2is inthe off state thecontents of the internalrelay WR3 internalrelaysR30 to R3F are shifted one bit to the left 1 is shifted in R30 if X0 is on and 0 is shifted in R30 if X0 is off If the X2 turns on the contents of WR3 are reset to ...

Page 165: ... the contents of WR are cleared When reset input is turned on WR Binary data 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Contents of WR3 are cleared to 0 WR Binary data Precautions during programming The SR instruction needs data input a shift input and a reset input When the reset input and the shift input are detected simultaneously the reset input has priority Reset input Da...

Page 166: ... combination with instructions which change the order of instruction execution such as MC and MCE or JP and LBL see below the operation of the instruction may change depending on the timing of instruction execution and the shift input Exercise caution in these cases MC to MCE instructions JP to LBL instructions F19 SJP to LBL instructions LOOP to LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instr...

Page 167: ...rea Master control relay number 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ST X 0 MC 1 ST X 1 OR Y 31 OT Y 31 ST X 2 OR Y 32 OT Y 32 MCE 1 Explanation of example Executes the program from the MC1 instruction to the MCE1 instruction when the execution condition X0 turns on If the executionconditionis off output is turned off without processingbeingcarriedout betweenthe MC1and MCE1 instructions X1 on off X2 on off on off on...

Page 168: ...Differential See next page Other instructions Not executed You must be careful when using one of the instructions below which are executed by detecting the leading edge of execution condition such as the differential instruction DF instruction Count input for CT instruction Count input for F118 UDC instruction Shift input for SR instruction Shift input for F119 LRSR instruction NSTP instruction Di...

Page 169: ...xecution there fore differential output is not obtained X0 X1 Y10 The input X1 of the differential instruction has changed from off to on with respect to the pre vious execution therefore differential output is obtained Execution of previous differential instruction on off on off on off on off on off on off Output will not be obtained if the same execution condition is specified for an MC instruct...

Page 170: ... Y11 MCE 2 X2 MC 1 X0 MC 0 MCE 1 MCE 0 X1 Y10 X5 Y12 X4 MC 2 The program cannot be executed if If either MC or MCE is missing The order of the MC and MCE instructions is reversed X1 Y10 MC 0 X0 MCE 0 There are two or more master control instruction sets with the same number X2 Y10 MCE 0 X1 MC 0 X0 MC 0 MCE 0 Duplicated use Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr co...

Page 171: ...that has the same number as the specified jump number The program then continues with the instructions starting from the address of the label that is the jump destination The same label is used for the JP LOOP and F19 SJP instructions Any of these instructions can be used as the starting point for the jump destination Two or more JP instructions with the same number can be used in a program LBL 1 ...

Page 172: ...rom a sub program to a main program or from a sub program to another sub program TM CT and SR instruction operation between JP and LBL instructions When the LBL instruction is located after the JP instruction TM instruction The TM instruction is not executed If it is not executed once during a single scan the correct time cannot be guaranteed CT instruction Even if the count input is on counting i...

Page 173: ... X1 Y10 Since the execution condition X1 for the differential instruction changed from on to off from the previous execution the differential output can be obtained Previous execution of JP instruction on off on off on off on off on off on off When the execution condition for the JP instruction equals the execution condition for the differential instruction the leading edge or trailing edge of the...

Page 174: ...ea for setting number of times for loop operation Operands Instruction Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Instruction WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H modifier 5 Set value N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is...

Page 175: ... the jump operation is not executed it is ignored A label is common for the JP instruction the LOOP instruction and the F19 SJP instruction One can be used as the destination for all instructions as many times as required X20 LOOP 1 DT0 R20 JP 1 X0 JP 1 LBL 1 Two or more LBL instructions with the same number cannot be specified in a program With the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH index modification of the n...

Page 176: ... the shift input is on no shift is performed The contents of the specified register are preserved When the LBL instruction is located before the LOOP instruction TM instruction Because the timer will run several times during a single scan the correct time cannot be guaranteed see note CT instruction If the state of the count input does not change during the scan it will operate in the usual way SR...

Page 177: ... MV DT100 IXDT200 R0 LBL 10 R0 F0 MV K 20 DT 0 F35 1 IX LOOP 10 DT 0 F0 MV K 0 IX The LOOP instruction and LBL instruction cannot be used in the step ladder area the area between SSTP and STPE You cannot perform a jump from a main program to a sub program a subroutine program or interrupt program after the ED instruction from a sub programto a main program or from a sub programto another sub progr...

Page 178: ... instruction The BRK instruction is used for checking the program by executing a part of the program How to use the BRK instruction Procedure 1 Set the INITIALIZE TEST switch of the CPU to the TEST side 2 Select the modes for TEST RUN operation by using programming tool software as follows Output DISABLE or ENABLE select one according to your requirements BRK VALID in the BRK instruction valid mod...

Page 179: ...he program execution If a BRK instruction is executed program execution stops Execution BRK 35 X12 13 X1 Y31 Stops at the address 35 Starts from the address 13 6 Up to the end of the program proceed according to the operation in steps 4 and 5 above If you want change to the step operation mode in which the program stops execution after execution of each instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4...

Page 180: ... Y 30 ED Description Indicates the end of the ordinary program 0 Address ED Ordinary program Subroutine program Interrupt program Program area Program areas are divided into an ordinary program area main program and subroutine and interrupt program areas sub programs using this instruction Enter subroutine programs and interrupt programs after the ED instruction ED End Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 7...

Page 181: ...performing the operations only after a required number of program scans are completed The CNDE instruction cannot be performed in sub programs such as subroutine programs or interrupt programs Use the CNDE instruction in the main program area only Two or more CNDE instructions can be used within the main program You must be careful when using one of the instructions below which are executed by det...

Page 182: ...xecution during normal scanning Program execution when the CNDE instruction is executed when X3 turns on This part of the program is not executed when the CNDE instruction is executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 183: ...rt the EJECT instruction in the address where you want the page to break when printing out the program you created In the above the page will break at address 2 Description When printing out the program created with the software tool the page will break at the position where this instruction is inserted As with the NOP instruction processes in the program will not be affected EJECT Eject Phone 800...

Page 184: ...Basic Instructions 2 74 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 185: ...ocess STPE Indicates the end of step ladder area Program example Ladder Diagram Boolean Ladder Diagram Address Instruction NSTP 1 SSTP 1 NSTL 2 SSTP 2 CSTP 50 STPE Y10 17 X0 10 14 X1 18 22 X3 100 104 10 11 14 17 18 19 22 100 101 104 ST X 0 NSTP 1 SSTP 1 OT Y 10 ST X 1 NSTL 2 SSTP 2 ST X 3 CSTP 50 STPE Next step scan execution type SSTP NSTL NSTP CSTP STPE Start step Next step pulse execution type ...

Page 186: ...the sequence control selection branch control parallel branch control are easily executed Sequence control Only the necessary processes are switched and executed in order Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 Process 4 Selection branch control The processes are selected and executed according to conditions Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 Process 4 Parallel branch merge control Multiple processes are execute...

Page 187: ... programmed in sub program subroutine or interrupt program area The area starting from the first SSTP instruction to the STPE instruction is referred to as the step ladder area The programs in this area are all controlled as processes Other areas are referred to as ordinary ladder areas SSTP 1 SSTP n STPE Ordinary ladder area Ordinary ladder area Step ladder area There is a special internal relay ...

Page 188: ...eration during the next scan The NSTP instruction is a differential pulse execution type instruction so it is executed for only one time when the execution condition trigger turns on Also since it only detects if the execution condition trigger has changed between on and off when switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is turned on while in the RUN mode and the execution condition trigge...

Page 189: ...rite this instruction at the end of the last process Thus the final process of the step ladder is from SSTP to STPE Process n Ordinary ladder area Ordinary ladder area Step ladder area SSTP 1 SSTP n STPE In the above situation process n is the last process The STPE instruction is used only once in the main program This instruction cannot be programmed in sub program such as a subroutine program or...

Page 190: ... operations When the step ladder processes are programmed program execution proceeds in the ordinary ladder area and in the processes triggered by the next step instructions NSTL or NSTP Processes that have not been triggered are ignored SSTP 1 SSTP 2 SSTP 9 STPE ED Not executing process 1 Executing process 2 Ordinary ladder area Executing Not executing Not executing process 9 Ordinary ladder area...

Page 191: ... active processes If you do not want them to be on at the same time program with an interlock circuit If there is a possibility of processes being simultaneously on because of hardware response delays adapt hardware processing to take the response delay into account Example Y11 SSTP 0 SSTP 1 Y10 NSTP 1 X0 Y10 Y11 If the process is cleared the instructions in that process operate as follows Instruc...

Page 192: ...tion is executed the next process is activated and the currently executing process is cleared It is not necessary to execute in order of process number You can also program the NSTL instruction to trigger a previous process in response to current conditions Program example 1 When the X10 turns on process 10 is executed 2 When X11 turns on process 10 is cleared and process 11 is executed 3 When X12...

Page 193: ...ocess 200 is executed When X104 turns on in process 102 process 102 is cleared and process 200 is executed 4 When X200 turns on process 200 is cleared and step ladder operation finishes on off on off on off on off Process 100 Process 101 Time chart on off on off Process 200 Executing Cleared Executing Cleared Executing Cleared Executing Cleared X100 X101 X102 X103 X104 X200 R150 R151 R152 R153 Whe...

Page 194: ...erge processes include a flag indicating the state of the other processes in the transfer condition for the next process When they merge and execute the next process clear all uncleared processes at the same time Program example 1 When X0 turns on process 0 is executed 2 When X10 turns on process 0 is cleared and process 10 and process 20 are executed simultaneously Parallel branch control 3 When ...

Page 195: ... STPE Explanation of example When input XF goes on processes in operation from 1 through 3 are cleared Process 0 X0 Process 1 XF END Process 3 X1 Process 2 Description When an SCLR instruction is executed all processes in operation from process n1 through process n2 are cleared Precautions during programming Set so that n1 is greater than or equal to n2 n1 n2 The SCLR instruction can be executed f...

Page 196: ...on the program returns to the address after the CALL instruction of the main program and the execution of the main program resumes ED SUB n RET CALL n X0 Main program Main program Subroutine program 1 2 3 When CALLn is executed the program is executed in the order 1 2 3 shown above Subroutine Program Syntax The subroutine program n is the program from the SUBn instruction to the RET instruction Al...

Page 197: ...ng Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when performing five nestings and executing the CALL instruction for the subroutine of the 5th nesting Precautions during programming In the interrupt program a subroutine program cannot be used SUB 21 RET IRET INT 1 Subroutine In the subroutine program an interrupt program cannot be used Interrupt program INT 0 IRET RET SUB 21 Subroutine For the FP0 FP ...

Page 198: ...tion is specified by P and a number When the CALL instruction execution condition trigger is off If the execution condition trigger for the CALL instruction is in the off state the subroutine program is not executed This is the same for CALL instructions within master controls or step ladders When the execution condition trigger for the CALL instruction is in the off state the instructions in the ...

Page 199: ...gram is not executed When the trigger for the CALL instruction is in the off state the instructions in the subroutine program operate as follows Instruction Operation status OT All off differs from a normal subroutine instruction KP Holds the state SET Holds the state RST Holds the state TM Resets differs from a normal subroutine instruction CT Holds the state at the time just before the trigger t...

Page 200: ... possible However it will not be possible to use certain MC numbers depending on the number of nesting levels as shown below Calls from other than subroutines MC255 2nd MC255 to 254 3rd MC255 to 253 4th MC255 to 252 5th MC255 to 251 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 201: ...mber specified is executed starting from the INT instruction When the interrupt program reaches the IRET instruction the program returns to the address where the interrupt occurred and the main program resumes ED INT n IRET DF X0 Interrupt program n ICTL S1 S2 Main program Interrupting 1 2 3 When the interrupt occurs the program is executed in the order 1 2 3 shown above FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X INT...

Page 202: ...T13 X202 INT24 Periodical interrupt Interrupt P N High speed counter initiated interrupt p Program No FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Ry FP X Tr INT0 ch0 ch0 ch0 ch0 ch0 INT1 ch1 ch1 ch1 ch1 ch1 INT2 ch2 ch2 INT3 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch3 ch3 INT4 ch3 ch3 ch3 ch4 ch4 INT5 ch5 ch5 INT6 ch4 ch6 ch6 INT7 ch5 ch7 ch7 INT8 PLS ch0 ch8 INT9 PLS ch1 ch9 INT10 PLS ch2 INT11 PLS ch3 chA INT12 chB INT13 Note When using thehig...

Page 203: ...lag in RUN to enable the interrupt programs again automatically using the ladder program The R9034 is a special relay that turns on for only I scan after the completion of the rewriting in the RUN mode Interrupt program execution There are three types of interrupt 1 Interrupt from the input contact The interrupt occurs when the input specified at system register 403 2 High speed counter initiated ...

Page 204: ...not undergo I O refreshing Therefore contacts other than the interrupt input contact such as the constantly on relay R9010 should be specified by the input conditions in the interrupt program INT 5 IRET X5 F0 MV K10 DT100 Specify R9010 or other contact instead of X5 A subroutine program cannot be used in an interrupt program SUB 11 RET IRET INT 1 Subroutine An interrupt program cannot be used in a...

Page 205: ... off INT3 input INT3 program on off When more than one interrupt occurs while a interrupt program is being executed the other programs will be executed in order from the smallest number to the greatest after the program currently being executed is finished Example INT2 input Main program INT1 program on off INT3 input INT2 program on off INT4 input INT3 program on off INT1 input on off INT4 progra...

Page 206: ...s and when the interrupt program is actually executed If you do not want to execute the interrupt program placed in the execution waiting state because of this it can be cleared with the ICTL instruction An interrupt program that is cleared will not be executed Example Main program INT1 program INT1 input on off INT2 program INT2 input on off Clear ICTL INT2 clear execution When the execution of i...

Page 207: ... interrupt occurs the program is executed in the order 1 2 3 shown above In the default mode all interrupt programs are disabled and cannot be executed The ICTL instruction should be used to enable execution of an interrupt program Syntax of interrupt program An interrupt program n n 0 to 24 is the program between the INTn instruction and the IRET instruction The interrupt program must always be p...

Page 208: ...occurs in fixed time intervals Set the time interval with the ICTL instruction When the interrupt occurs the interrupt program with the corresponding number is executed Main program INT program Interrupt input on off Execution Execution Execution If interrupts are disabled an interrupt will occur only at the point when interrupts are enabled with the ICTL instruction Main program INT program Execu...

Page 209: ...5 IRET X5 F0 MV K10 DT100 Specify R9010 or other contact instead of X5 A subroutine program cannot be used in an interrupt program SUB 21 RET IRET INT 1 Subroutine An interrupt program cannot be used in a subroutine program Interrupt program INT 0 IRET RET SUB 21 Subroutine Interrupt programs with multiple entrances and one exit can be written Example When the interrupt of the interrupt program 11...

Page 210: ... on off INT3 input INT3 program on off When more than one interrupt occurs while a interrupt program is being executed the other programs will be executed in order from the smallest number to the greatest after the program currently being executed is finished Example INT2 input Main program INT1 program on off INT3 input INT2 program on off INT4 input INT3 program on off INT1 input on off INT4 pro...

Page 211: ...curs and when the interrupt program is actually executed If you do not want to execute the interrupt program placed in the execution waiting state because of this it can be cleared with the ICTL instruction An interrupt program that is cleared will not be executed Example Main program INT1 program INT1 input on off INT2 program INT2 input on off Clear ICTL INT2 clear execution When the execution o...

Page 212: ... A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Description When the ICTL instruction is executed the interrupt program enable disable and interrupt clear are set according to the settings in S1 and S2 Be sure to use ICTL instructionsso that they are executedonce at the leadingedge of the executioncondition trigger using the DF instruction Two or more ICTL instructions can have the same ...

Page 213: ...ain ICTL H2 K1 R9013 Executes INT24 every 10 ms R9034 Input examples Example 1 Setting a periodical interrupt every 10ms from the start of operations ICTL H2 K1 R9013 Executes INT24 every 10ms The R9013 initial pulse relay turns on only for the first scan after operations begin Example 2 Enable INT0 through INT3 when X0 rises ICTL H0 HF X0 DF X0 Enables INT0 to INT3 when on Example 3 Clear interru...

Page 214: ...he time interval for INT24 Precautions during programming The inputs that can be actually used as an interrupt input are different depending on the models Refer to the table below Interrupt P N Interrupt input p Program No FP0 FP e FPΣ FP0R FP X Ry FP X Tr INT0 X0 X0 X0 X0 INT1 X1 X1 X1 X1 INT2 X2 X2 X2 X2 INT3 X3 X3 X3 X3 INT4 X4 X4 X4 X4 INT5 X5 X5 X5 X5 INT6 X6 X6 X6 INT7 X7 X7 X7 INT8 X100 INT...

Page 215: ...pt program that you want to control Set the bit corresponding to the number of the program you want to clear to 0 INT program disabled Set the bit corresponding to the number of the program you want to not clear to 1 INT program enabled Example When specified so that the interrupt programs INT0 to INT2 are cleared and INT3 to INT13 are not cleared Bit position 8 7 4 3 0 12 11 15 INT program number...

Page 216: ...S2 Bit position 8 7 4 3 0 12 11 15 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 12 3 2 1 0 X0 INT0 X1 INT1 X2 INT2 X3 INT3 X4 INT4 X5 INT5 Input contact INT No 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 X6 INT6 X7 INT7 X8 INT8 X9 INT9 X10 INT10 X11 INT11 X12 INT12 X13 INT13 Set the bits to 1 that correspond to the interrupts to be enabled When this ICTL instruction is executed interrupt programs No 0 and No 5 will be executed when ...

Page 217: ...ter initiated interrupt p Program No FP0 FP e FPΣ FP0R FP X Ry FP X Tr INT0 ch0 ch0 ch0 ch0 INT1 ch1 ch1 ch1 ch1 INT2 ch2 ch2 INT3 ch2 ch2 ch3 ch3 INT4 ch3 ch3 ch4 ch4 INT5 ch5 ch5 INT6 ch6 ch6 INT7 ch7 ch7 INT8 ch8 INT9 ch9 INT10 INT11 chA INT12 chB INT13 3 Enable the setting by the ICTLinstruction Enable ICTL H0 H9 INT0 and INT7 4 Start the match ON match OFF instruction 5 The program is execute...

Page 218: ...d the INT0 program will not be executed even after execution is enabled Since INT1 is not cleared the INT1 program will be executed after execution is enabled Example for setting periodical interrupt Example ICTL H2 K1500 DF S1 S2 S1 H0002 Specifies periodical interrupt S2 K1500 Specifies the time interval for the periodical interrupt With K1500 the time interval is K1500 x 10ms 15000ms 15s After ...

Page 219: ...c Instructions 2 109 To stop the periodical interrupt program execute the following program ICTL H2 K0 DF FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 220: ...is executed the interrupt program enable disable and interrupt clear are set according to the settings in S1 and S2 Be sure to use ICTL instructionsso that they are executedonce at the leadingedge of the executioncondition trigger using the DF instruction Two or more ICTL instructions can have the same execution condition trigger Note Before executing an interrupt program be sure to execute the IC...

Page 221: ...when the program of INT0 is finished Specifying control data S1 Specifying the control functions and interrupt types 8 7 4 3 0 12 11 15 S1 Bit position Selection of control function H00 Interrupt execution enabled disabled H01 Interrupt clear Interrupt type selection H00 INT 0 to INT15 H01 INT16 to INT23 1 H02 INT24 10ms units H03 INT24 0 5ms units 2 H04 INT24 in increments of 10 ms 3 H05 INT24 in...

Page 222: ...disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 2120 19 18 1716 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 Clearing interrupt programs when S1 H100 or S1 H101 Set the control data in the bit corresponding to the number of the interrupt program that you want to control Set the bit corresponding to the number of the program you want to clear to 0 INT program disabled Set the bit corresponding to the number ...

Page 223: ...f S2 0 5 ms Bit position 8 7 4 3 0 12 11 15 S2 K0 to K3000 Time interval setting K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s INT24 disabled K0 Note For the difference in the operation of H3 and H5 refer to Example 2 for setting periodical interrupt H5 can be specified with the PLC FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 50 or later FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 224: ... Bit position 8 7 4 3 0 12 11 15 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 INT number 5 4 3 2 1 0 X0 INT0 X1 INT1 X2 INT2 X3 INT3 X4 INT4 X5 INT5 Interrupt unit 7 6 9 8 11 10 13 12 15 14 X6 INT6 X7 INT7 X8 INT8 X9 INT9 XA INT10 XB INT11 XC INT12 XD INT13 XE INT14 XF INT15 Set the bits to 1 that correspond to the interrupts to be enabled The I O number is an example showing the interrupt unit mounted in Slot...

Page 225: ...xecuted when their corresponding interrupt inputs occur Main program INT0 program INT0 input on off INT8 program Execution Disabled Enabled ICTL instruction INT8 input on off Condition Execution Execution Execution FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 226: ...rams Even though the INT0 interrupt input occurred when the interrupt program is disabled the ICTL instruction can still be used to clear the INT0 interrupt Main program INT0 program INT0 input on off INT8 program Disabled Enabled INT8 input on off Condition Execution ICTL instruction Clear Execution Execution Since INT0 is cleared the INT0 program will not be executed even after execution is enab...

Page 227: ...al is K1500 x 10ms 15000ms 15s After this ICTL instruction is executed the periodical interrupt will occur every 15 seconds At these times the INT24 interrupt program will be executed INT24 program Main program 15s 15s Execution ICTL instruction Execution Execution To stop the periodical interrupt program execute the following program ICTL H2 K0 DF FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4...

Page 228: ...e is 500 µs or longer the interval is automatically shifted in increments of 500 µs Int S2 Constant timer kind H04 H05 Int S2 Int S2 Int Regardless of the execution time of the interrupt program it is executed for the fixed interval The specified time interval for the periodical interrupt must be longer than the time taken for the interrupt processing Setting for Interrupt time interval K0 to 3000...

Page 229: ...ifier S N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example When R0 turns on the transmission format and baud rate for the COM 1 port are set as follows Character bit 8 Parity Odd Stop bit 1 Baud rate 19 200 bps Description The communication conditions for the port specified by No 1 keyword are changed to the contents specified by No 2 keyword Contents that can be changed ...

Page 230: ...57600 57 600 bps 115200 115 200 bps SYS1 M TOOL 19200 The baud rates of 300 600 or 1200 bps can be specified only with the FP0R FP X ver 2 0 or later and FPΣ ver3 10 or later Also those baud rates cannot be specified by the system register 3 Unit No Shared by the Tool COM 1 and COM 2 ports Port used TOOL Tool port COM1 COM 1 port COM2 COM 2 port Unit No No1 to No99 No 1 to No 99 SYS1 M TOOL No1 Fo...

Page 231: ... rewrite the contents of the system ROM in the control unit As a result turning the power supply off and then on again rewrites the contents of the system registers specified by the tool software We recommend using differential execution with this instruction Because the system register settings are changed a verification error may occur in some cases if verification is carried out with the tools ...

Page 232: ...is instruction is anything other than a value between 1 and 99 The baud rate or transmission format for COM1 has been changed when the PLC link mode is specified for COM1 The baud rate or transmission format is changed while the Tool port COM port 1 or COM port 2 is being initialized using MODEM The communication mode is set to anything other than the general communication mode when header and ter...

Page 233: ...R 1 DF SYS1 M PAS abcdefgh S Character constant M Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H M modifier S N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example When R0 turns on the controller password is changed to ABCD Description This changes the password specified by the controller to the c...

Page 234: ...al execution with this instruction For No 1 and No 2 keywords input 12 letters after M aligning to the right Separate No 1 and No 2 keywords with a comma and do not use spaces An operation error will occur Example If inputting SYS1 M COM1 WAIT2 Input M C O M 1 W A I T 2 Input a space after M to be 12 letter aligning to the right Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error fla...

Page 235: ...f example When R0 turns on input X1 is set to the interrupt that becomes valid at the rising edge Description This sets the input specified by No 1 keyword as the interrupt input and changes the input conditions to the contents specified by No 2 keyword Keyword setting SYS1 M INT2 UP Interrupt input INT0 X0 INT1 X1 INT2 X2 INT3 X3 INT4 X4 INT5 X5 INT6 X6 INT7 X7 INT8 INT10 Pulse I O cassette 1 INT...

Page 236: ...ified When BOTH has been specified the contents of the system registers do not change For No 1 and No 2 keywords input 12 letters after M aligning to the right Separate No 1 and No 2 keywords with a comma and do not use spaces An operation error will occur Example If inputting SYS1 M COM1 WAIT2 Input M C O M 1 W A I T 2 Input a space after M to be 12 letter aligning to the right Flag conditions Er...

Page 237: ...e for transmission assurance relay 100 ms Description The conditions specified by No 1 keyword are set as the time specified by No 2 keyword The setting for the link entry waiting time is set if the transmission cycle time is shortened when there are stations that have not joined the link Stations that have not joined the link Stations that have not been connected between the No 1 station and the ...

Page 238: ...specified there may be some PLCs that are not able to join the link even though the power supply for that PLC has been turned on If there are any stations that have not joined the link the setting should not be changed even if the link transmission cycle time is longer as a result The default value is 400 ms Precautions when setting the error detection time for the transmission assurance relay Thi...

Page 239: ... A N A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example When R0 turns on the operation mode of the high speed counter CH0 is set to the addition mode Description This changes the operation mode of the high speed counter specified by No 1 keyword to the operation mode specified by No 2 keyword Keyword setting SYS1 M HSC1 UP High speed counter setting HSCn n 0 to 9 A B with FP X Ry type n 0 to 7 with FP X T...

Page 240: ...sters change in accordance with the specification so a verification error may occur in some cases when the program is verified When BOTH has been specified the contents of the system registers do not change For No 1 and No 2 keywords input 12 letters after M aligning to the right Separate No 1 and No 2 keywords with a comma and do not use spaces An operation error will occur Example If inputting S...

Page 241: ... COM response time specified by No 1 keyword is delayed based on the contents specified by No 2 keyword This instruction is used to delay the response time on the PLC side until the state is reached in which commands can be sent by an external device and responses can be received from the PLC Usage example When a commercial RS232C RS485 converter is being used to carry out communication between a ...

Page 242: ...be set We recommend using differential execution with this instruction When the power supply to the PLC is off the settings set by this instruction are cleared The set value will become 0 If the mode is switched to the PROG mode after the instruction has been executed however the settings will be retained If a commercial RS232C RS485 converter is being used in the PLC link mode this instruction sh...

Page 243: ... Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H modifier S N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A D1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A Description The contents of system registers No 40 to No 47 are changed to the contents of the data registers starting with the number ...

Page 244: ... relay transmission size 0 to 64 words WO 1 54 Starting number for link data register transmission 128 to 255 55 Link data register transmission size 0 to 127 words 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 PLC link 1 to 16 Program example F0 MV K 64 DT0 F0 MV K 128 DT1 F0 MV K 0 DT2 F0 MV K 10 DT3 F0 MV K 0 DT4 F0 MV K 10 DT5 F0 MV K 0 DT6 F0 MV K 5 DT7 Set value of system register 40 SYS2 DT0...

Page 245: ...K47 should be specified for D1 or D2 Also the values should always be specified in such a way that D1 D2 The values of the system registers change so a verification error may occur when the program is verified Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when D1 D2 The specified value is outside the ranges specified for the various system reg...

Page 246: ...er Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FPΣ FP X FP0R 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID ST ST ST ST ST ST 16 ...

Page 247: ...1 S2 S1 S2 ST off on off ST on off on ST off off on ST off on on ST on off off ST on on off Precautions concerning usage The start comparison instructions ST ST ST ST ST and ST are programmed from the bus line If mixedwithBCDor othertypeof data thevaluewillberegardedas negativewhenthemost significantbit is1 and a correct comparisonmay not be obtained In this case use an F81 BIN instructionor simil...

Page 248: ...Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FPΣ FP X FP0R 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ...

Page 249: ...en processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as 32 bit data Comparison Precautions concerning usage Thestart comparisoninstructionsSTD STD STD STD STD andSTD areprogrammedfrom the bus line If mixedwithBCDor othertypeof ...

Page 250: ...er Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FPΣ FP X 2 I0 to ID Index modification of a real number is not possible STF STF STF STF STF STF Floating point real number data comparison Start equal Floating point real number data co...

Page 251: ... on off When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as single precision real number data Comparison Precautions concerning usage The start comparison instructions STF STF STF STF STF and STF are programmed from the b...

Page 252: ...Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID 5 AN AN AN AN A...

Page 253: ...on instruction S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 AN off on off AN on off on AN off off on AN off on on AN on off off AN on on off Precautions concerning usage Multiple AND comparison instructions AN AN AN AN AN and AN can be used consecutively If mixedwithBCDor othertypeof data thevaluewillberegardedas negativewhenthemost significantbit is1 and a correct comparisonmay not be obtained In this case use an F81 BIN i...

Page 254: ... Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is...

Page 255: ...D on off off AND on on off When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 Comparison The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as 32 bit data Precautions concerning usage Multiple AND comparisons instructions AND AND AND AND AND and AND can be used consecutivel...

Page 256: ...er Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A2 A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FPΣ FP X 2 I0 to ID Index modification of a real number is not possible ANF ANF ANF ANF ANF ANF Floating point real number data comparison AND equal Floating point real number data com...

Page 257: ... off on on ANF on off off ANF on on off When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 Comparison The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as single precision real number data Precautions concerning usage Multiple ANF comparisons instructions ANF ANF ANF ANF A...

Page 258: ...nter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID OR OR OR O...

Page 259: ...f off OR on on off Precautions concerning usage The OR comparison instructions OR OR OR OR OR and OR are programmed from the bus line Multiple OR comparison instructions OR OR OR OR OR and OR can be used consecutively If mixedwithBCDor othertypeof data thevaluewillberegardedas negativewhenthemost significantbit is1 and a correct comparisonmay not be obtained In this case use an F81 BIN instruction...

Page 260: ...Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X 3 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FPΣ FP X FP0R FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH th...

Page 261: ...ta the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 Comparison The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as 32 bit data Precautions concerning usage The OR comparison instructions ORD ORD ORD ORD ORD and ORD are programmed from the bus line Multiple OR comparison instructions ORD ORD ORD OR...

Page 262: ...ister Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A2 A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FPΣ FP X 2 I0 to ID Index modification of a real number is not possible ORF ORF ORF ORF ORF ORF Floating point real number data comparison OR equal Floating point real number data c...

Page 263: ...rocessing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 Comparison The specified data area and the following data area are handled together as single precision real number data Precautions concerning usage TheORcomparisoninstructionsORF ORF ORF ORF ORF andORF areprogrammedfrom the bus line Multiple OR comp...

Page 264: ...Basic Instructions 2 154 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 265: ...Chapter 3 High level Instructions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 266: ...High level Instructions 3 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 267: ...used to specify the processing method and the storage area for processed data etc Operands are classified into three types S source D destination and n number The number of operands differ depending on the instruction Operand types Source Data which is to be processed or data which sets the processing method Destination Location where result of processing is stored number Numeric data which is to ...

Page 268: ... number A high level instruction with the prefix F is executed in every scan while its execution condition trigger is in the on state A high level instruction with the prefix P is executed only when the leading edge of its execution condition trigger is detected For details about F and P type high level instructions section 3 1 4 Input of F type high level instruction F0 MV K 0 DT 0 X0 F 0 Input o...

Page 269: ...gger many times when two or more high level instructions are programmed consecutively with the same execution condition trigger Example F0 MV K50 DT1 X0 This execution condition trigger is not required F151 WRT K0 DT1 K1 K0 X0 F0 MV K50 DT1 X0 F151 WRT K0 DT1 K1 K0 Precautions if omitting execution conditions triggers If you need to program both F and P type high level instructions using the same ...

Page 270: ...ng edge of the execution condition trigger is detected and a single scan is executed P type high level instruction Execution condition Trigger 1 scan on off Execution As long as the execution condition trigger for the P type instruction continues to be on the instruction is executed only at the rise of the condition and is not subsequently executed If the mode is switched to the RUN mode or the po...

Page 271: ... execution conditions triggers MC to MCE instructions JP to LBL instructions F19 SJP to LBL instructions LOOP to LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instructions Subroutine instruction For detailed information section 4 3 When combining the P type high level instruction with an AND stack instruction or pop stack instruction be careful that the programming is correct For detailed informat...

Page 272: ...A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example The contents of data register DT10 are copied to data register DT20 when trigger R0 turns on Description The 16 bit data ...

Page 273: ...value EV0 to data register DT0 when R2 turns on F0 MV EV 0 DT 0 R2 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 274: ...N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example The contents of data registers DT11 and DT10 are copied to data registers DT21 and DT20 when trigger R0 turns on Content fo...

Page 275: ... are specified Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Reference FP1 FP M high speed counter elapsed value F1 DMV page FP0 FP e FPΣ FP X high speed counter pulse output elapsed value F1 DMV page 3 449 Phone 800...

Page 276: ... the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example The contents of data register DT11 are inverted and transferred to data register DT20 when trigger R0 turns on DT 20 DT 21 DT 22 DT 10 DT 11 DT 12 DT 20 DT 21 DT 22 Bit position DT11 15...

Page 277: ...1 1 0 4 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 D 2 Hexadecimal Bit position 15 1 1 1 12 1 11 1 0 1 8 1 7 0 0 1 4 0 3 1 1 0 0 1 F B 2 D 1 Binary data Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ...

Page 278: ...ower 16 bit area of 32 bit data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP1...

Page 279: ...is inverted and transferred to the 32 bit area specified by D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 S S 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 D D 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S D are specified Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the...

Page 280: ...tion of example The number of WX and WY for the slot specified by S is read and set in D D 1 Head number of WX of specified slot D D 1 Head number of WY of specified slot When the unit is with X only the same value is stored for the head number of WY When the unit is with Y only the same value is stored for the head number of WX When the unit without input output is specified the same value is sto...

Page 281: ...ifies source and destination bit positions D 16 bit area destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R ...

Page 282: ...pecify n The n specifies the source and destination bit positions using hexadecimal data as follows n H Bit position of source S set range H0 to HF Bit position of destination D set range H0 to HF Number of transfer bits Range other than the above 0 should be specified FP2 Ver 1 03 and subsequent versions FP2SH and FP10SH only Range From 0 to F can be specified refer to next page Bit position spec...

Page 283: ...16 bits No of bits transferred Setting n 1 bit H 0 2 bits H 1 3 bits H 2 4 bits H 3 5 bits H 4 6 bits H 5 7 bits H 6 8 bits H 7 9 bits H 8 10 bits H 9 11 bits H A 12 bits H B 13 bits H C 14 bits H D 15 bits H E 16 bits H F Example When two bits are being transferred n H 1 Two bits sent starting from bit position 5 of S to bit position 10 of D n HA15 F5 BTM execution Two bits starting from bit posi...

Page 284: ... 1 4 1 3 1 0 0 0 1 Bit position D 15 0 0 1 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 1 7 1 0 0 4 0 3 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 If the specified range extends beyond the area of D the contents of the part extending beyond the area are not transferred Data is not written to the next address Example Six bits starting from bit position 6 of S are transferred to bit position 12 of D n HC56 F5 BTM execution Six bits starting from bit positi...

Page 285: ...erand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of exa...

Page 286: ...instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit How to specify n n specifies the 3 source hexadecimal digit position the 2 number of digits and the 1 destination hexadecimal digit position to be copied using hexadecimal data as follows n H 3 Source Starting hexadecimal digit position H0 Hexadecimal digit 0 H1 Hexadecimal digit 1 H2 Hexadecimal digit 2 H3 Hexadecimal digi...

Page 287: ...decimal digits hexadecimal digits 2 and 3 of the destination 4 When multiple hexadecimal digits hexadecimal digits 0 and 1 of the source are copied to multiple hexadecimal digits hexadecimal digits 2 and 3 of the destination 5 When 4 hexadecimal digits hexadecimal digits 0 to 3 of the source are copied to 4 hexadecimal digits hexadecimal digits 0 to 3 of the destination S D S D S D S D 3 2 1 0 3 2...

Page 288: ...High level Instructions 3 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 289: ...nd Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example The contents of data register DT10 are copied to data register DT30 when trigger R0 turns on The conte...

Page 290: ... on Related instruction To copy three 16 bit data use the F190 MV3 instruction Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 291: ...gister Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example The contents of data register DT11 and DT10 and the contents of data register DT21 and DT20 are copied to d...

Page 292: ...ger turns on Related instruction To copy three 32 bit data use the F191 DMV3 instruction Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 293: ...A A A A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Description The data block specified by S1 and S2 is copied to the block starting from the 16 bit area specified by D Precautions during programming The starting area S1 and ending area S2 should be the same t...

Page 294: ...fer destination the transfer results will be overwritten If S1 D the source data is copied starting from the higher address to the lower addressin order DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 K 10 K 11 K 10 K 12 S1 DT0 DT1 DT2 S2 DT3 DT4 K 10 K 11 K 12 K 13 K 14 K 13 D DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 If S1 D the source data is copied starting from the lower address to the higher addressin order DT0 DT1 DT2 K 14 K 12 K 10 K 13 K 12 ...

Page 295: ...2 Ending 16 bit area destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the ...

Page 296: ...ecified by D1 and D2 Precautions during programming The starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be the same type of operand The area of the lower address for the block being copied should be specified by D1 and the higher address should be specified by D2 If D1 is specified as higher than D2 and the instruction is executed an operation error will occur When the same number as D1 and D2 is speci...

Page 297: ...ter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A S2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Explanation of example 10 blocks of data stored in blocks 0 to 9 of the EEPROM are transferred to data registers DT0 to DT63...

Page 298: ...Volume of data held in the EEPROM Type Volume that can be read FP0 C10 C14 C16 FP e 640 words FP0 C32 SL1 6 144 words FP0 T32 16 384 words Because the initial data in the EEPROM is not fixed caution is required when reading data that has not been written to the EEPROM Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The address specified by ...

Page 299: ...gister Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A S2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A Explanation of example 10 blocks of data stored in blocks 0 to 9 of the F ROM are transferred to data registers DT0 to DT20479when execution condi...

Page 300: ... words FP X C14 FP0R C10 14 16 12285 words Because the initial data in the F ROM is not fixed caution is required when reading data that has not been written to the F ROM The initial value of F ROM of FP0R can be cleared to 0 when the programs are all deleted with a tool software Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The address s...

Page 301: ...ay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This is I0 to IC 2 This is ID Explanation of example 10 words of data stored in addresses 0 to 9 of the IC card expansion memory area are transferred to...

Page 302: ...FF 2 M K1048574 K1048575 HFFFFF Note When using as remaining DOS formatted mkB expansion memory S2 1 to m x 1024 2 S1 0 to S2 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when No IC card is installed in the CPU The IC card access enable switch is set to off disabled No expansion memory area is found on the IC card The address specified by S1 ...

Page 303: ...r destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A Explanation of example 10 blocks 640 words of data stored in data registers D...

Page 304: ...m however please make sure that this instruction is not written to the EEPROM numerous times When the instructionis executed the operationexecutiontime will be approximately5 ms longerfor block 64 words This instruction should not be used in interrupt programs If the FP0R is used as the FP0 the execution time will be longer FP0 compatibility mode Comparative chart of execution time of FP0R in FP0 ...

Page 305: ...data for destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A S2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A Explanation of example 1 block 2 048 words of data stored in data registers DT0 is tra...

Page 306: ...s through erroneous programming it has been set up as a differential execution type of instruction P13 When setting up the program however please make sure that this instruction is not written to the F ROM numerous times The number of blocks that can be written to is only one Also a maximum time of approximately 100 ms is required for instruction execution To write to multiple blocks first divide ...

Page 307: ... Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A 1 This is I0 to IC 2 This is ID Explanation of example 10 words of data stored in data registers DT100 to DT109 are transferred to addresses 100 to 109 in the expan...

Page 308: ...F 512 k K262142 K262143 H3FFFF 1 M K524286 K524287 H7FFFF 2 M K1048574 K1048575 HFFFFF Note When using as remaining DOS formatted mkB expansion memory S2 1 to m x 1024 2 S1 0 to S2 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when No IC card is installed in the CPU The IC card access enable switch is set to off disabled Write protect is in ef...

Page 309: ...H this is I0 to IC 2 With the FP2SH FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example When the execution condition R0 is on the programs for file names written to data register DT100 and subsequent data registers are read from the IC memory card and are substituted for the program currently being executed If STEP2 is writtenfor dataregister DT100or asubsequentregister the programwith the file name STEP2 st...

Page 310: ...e are cleared When a program is read the system registers are rewritten at the same time The same system register settingsasthoseof thespecifiedprogramshouldalwaysbeused includingthe I O map remoteI O map and others Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when No IC card is installed in the CPU The IC card access enable switch is set to ...

Page 311: ...DT101 DT102 Final code Space codes Higher Lower Higher Lower Specific example of specifying a file name There are two ways to write a character code to a memory area specified by the F14 PGRD instruction The character code can be written directly using a data move instruction F0 or F1 The character code can be converted to the file name written when the program was created using the ASCII conversi...

Page 312: ...s executed the results are stored in a 6 word 12 character memory area The specification should be made as follows Operand of F95 M The file name 8 characters should be entered with characters filling the spaces starting from the left Spaces should be entered where characters are not specified Example indicates a space Specifying a file name of ABCD F95 ASC M ABCD DT 100 R0 R1 F14 PGRD DT 100 Spec...

Page 313: ...nds Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X...

Page 314: ...K 13 K 14 K 24 K 21 K 11 K 22 K 12 D1 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 K 20 K 10 K 23 K 13 K 14 K 24 D2 D2 Description The contents in the 16 bit areas specified by D1 and D2 are exchanged Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds...

Page 315: ...exchanged Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 Wit...

Page 316: ...25AC D1 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 1234 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 FFFD F23 D2 D2 H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H Description The contents in the 32 bit areas specified by D1 and D2 are exchanged Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exce...

Page 317: ... A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example The higher and lower bytes of data register DT0 are exchanged when trigger R0 turns on Bit position DT0 15 0 0 0 12 0 11 0 1 0 8 0 7 1 1 0 4 1 3 0...

Page 318: ...cified by D are exchanged Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 319: ...Ending 16 bit area of block data 1 D3 Starting 16 bit area of block data 2 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D3 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R F...

Page 320: ...m the 16 bit area specified by D3 are exchanged when the trigger turns on Precautions during programming The starting area D1 and ending area D2 should Be the same type of operand Satisfy D1 D2 If area D1 D2 an operation error occurs If the areas of blocks to be exchanged overlap correct exchange will not be possible Note however that an error will not occur the error flag will not turn on Flag co...

Page 321: ...WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A 1 With the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 2 With the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Skips to the label number with the same number as the value in data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on LBL 1 R0 F19 SJP DT 0 When DT0 K1 LBL 125 When DT0 K125 Program Program When DT0 is K1...

Page 322: ...s writtento anaddresspriorto the F19 SJP instruction beawarethat thereis a possibilitythat the scan cannot be completed and an operation bottleneck error will occur The F19 SJP instruction cannot be used in a stepladder area the range from SSTP to CSTP in a subroutine or in an interrupt program A jump cannot be made from a main program to a sub program subroutines or interrupt programs written sub...

Page 323: ...ot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example The contents of data register DT10 and data register DT1 are added together when trigger R0 turns on When the decimal number 4 is in DT1 and the decimal number 8 is in DT...

Page 324: ...ddition is recommended When you use the F21 D instruction instead of F20 be sure to convert the 16 bit addend and augend into 32 bit data using the F89 EXT instruction If an overflow or underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 T...

Page 325: ...augend and result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 Wit...

Page 326: ...ult D 1 D D 1 D S 1 S Addend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow or underflow to occur If an overflow or underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions E...

Page 327: ...area for addend D 16 bit area for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R F...

Page 328: ...values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow or underflow to occur If the calculated result accidentally overflows or underflows use of the F23 D instruction 32 bit data addition is recommended When you use the F23 D instruction instead of F22 be sure to convert the 16 bit addend and augend into 32 bit data using the F89 EXT i...

Page 329: ... data for addend D Lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0...

Page 330: ...ng 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 D are specified Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow or underflow to occur If an overf...

Page 331: ... A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Subtracts the contents of data register DT10 from the contents of data register DT20 when trigger R0 turns on Exam...

Page 332: ...calculated result accidentally overflows or underflows use of the F26 D instruction 32 bit data subtraction is recommended When you use the F26 D instruction instead of F25 be sure to convert the 16 bit subtrahend and minuend into 32 bit data using the F89 EXT instruction If an overflow or underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Tu...

Page 333: ...ta for minuend and result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to ...

Page 334: ... D 1 D D 1 D S 1 S Subtrahend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow or underflow to occur If an overflow or underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions ...

Page 335: ...d FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Description Subtractsthe16 bitdataor 16 bitequivalentconstantspecifiedby S2 from the 16 bit dataor 16 bitequivalent constant specified by S1 The subtracted result is stored in D Minuend data Result S1 D S2 Subtrahend da...

Page 336: ...211 8 7 4 3 0 Bit position DT10 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 Minuend S1 K3 Subtrahend S2 K5 Result D K 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Subtraction Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal ci...

Page 337: ...bit data for subtrahend D Lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 F...

Page 338: ...S2 Subtrahend data When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 D are specified Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow or underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow o...

Page 339: ...ea of 32 bit data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP...

Page 340: ...pecified memory area DT30 and the higher16 bits are stored in the area following the specified area DT31 Description Multiplies the 16 bit data or 16 bit equivalent constant specified by S1 and the 16 bit data or 16 bit equivalent constant specified by S2 The multiplied result is stored in D 1 and D 32 bit area Multiplicand data Result S1 D 1 D S2 Multiplier data The multiplied result is stored in...

Page 341: ... A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Contents of DT11 Contents of DT20 Contents of DT21 16 bits 16 bits Cont...

Page 342: ...tomatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified The areas D 3 D 2 D 1 other than the lowest 16 bit area D are automatically determined once the lowest 16 bit area is specified Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the inde...

Page 343: ...tored in special data register DT9015 DT90015 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the F...

Page 344: ...ta or 16 bit equivalent constant specified by S2 The quotient is stored in D and the remainder is stored in the special data register DT9015 DT90015 for FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Dividend data Quotient S1 D S2 Divisor Remainder DT9015 DT90015 With the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 FP e the numbers of the special data registers are different Type Specia...

Page 345: ... is stored in special data registers DT9016 and DT9015 DT90016 and DT90015 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the ...

Page 346: ...it S2 lower 16 bit S2 1 higher16 bit Divisor Remainder DT9015 DT90015 DT9016 DT90016 When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 D are specified With the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 FP e the numbers of the special data registers are different Type Special data register FP0 C10 C1...

Page 347: ...WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Multiplies the contents of data register DT10 and data register DT20 when trigger R0 turns on The multiplied result is stored in data register DT30 ...

Page 348: ...ultiplied result is stored in the 16 bit area Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The calculated result exceeds the 16 bit area specified by D flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Precautions during programming Keep the calc...

Page 349: ...d with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Adds 1 to the contents of data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Bit position DT0 15 0 0 0 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 0 0 4 0 3 1 0 0 0 1 Original d...

Page 350: ...If an overflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Carry flag...

Page 351: ...A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Adds 1 to the content of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Contents of DT1 Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits Con...

Page 352: ...ur If an overflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Carry f...

Page 353: ...the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Subtracts 1 from the contents of data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Bit position DT0 15 0 0 0 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 0 0 4 0 3 1 0 1 0 0 Original data D K10 1 Bit position DT0 15 ...

Page 354: ...If an underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Carry fla...

Page 355: ... IY K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Subtracts 1 from the content of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits 1 Contents of DT1 Contents of DT0 Store to...

Page 356: ... occur If an underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Ca...

Page 357: ...nds Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Multiplies the contents of data registers DT11 and DT10 ...

Page 358: ...r 16 bit The multiplied result is stored in the 32 bit area 2 words Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The calculated result exceeds the 32 bit area specified by D flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Precautions during pro...

Page 359: ...rea for 4 digit BCD data for augend and result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10...

Page 360: ...Result D D S Addend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow to occur If the calculated result accidentally overflows use of the F41 DB instruction 8 digit BCD data addition is recommended If an overflow occurs the...

Page 361: ...ea for 8 digit BCD data for augend and result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and F...

Page 362: ... D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit S lower 4 digit S 1 higher 4 digit D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit Addend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow to occur If an overflow occurs the carry flag special intern...

Page 363: ...nt or 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data for addend D 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be...

Page 364: ...red in D Augend data Result S1 D S2 Addend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an overflow to occur If the calculated result accidentally overflows use of the F43 DB instruction 8 digit BCD data addition is recommended If...

Page 365: ...equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for addend D Lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with ...

Page 366: ... 4 digit S2 1 higher 4 digit D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit Addend data When processing 8 digit BCD data the higher 16 bit areas for 8 digit BCD data S 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S D are specified Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an overflow will ...

Page 367: ... N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Subtracts the contents of data register DT10 from the contents of data register DT20 when trigger R0 turns on When H BCD 16 is in DT20 and H BCD 4 i...

Page 368: ... calculated result accidentally underflows use of the F46 DB instruction 8 digit BCD data subtraction is recommended If an underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data is not BCD data flag R900B...

Page 369: ...it BCD data for subtrahend D Lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for minuend and result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP...

Page 370: ...ower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit S lower 4 digit S 1 higher 4 digit D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit Addend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an underflow to occur If an underflow occurs the carry flag special interna...

Page 371: ...ent constant or 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data for subtrahend D 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 ...

Page 372: ... specified by S1 The subtracted result is stored in D Minuend data Result S1 D S2 Subtrahend data Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values which can be handled an underflow will result Under normal circumstances do not allow an underflow to occur If the calculated result accidentally underflows use of the F48 DB in...

Page 373: ...t or lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for subtrahend D Lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and ...

Page 374: ...igit S1 1 higher 4 digit S2 lower 4 digit S2 1 higher 4 digit D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit Subtrahend data When processing 8 digit BCD data the higher 16 bit areas for 8 digit BCD data S 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S D are specified Precautions during programming If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction does not fall within the range of values w...

Page 375: ... BCD data for multiplier D Lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP...

Page 376: ...he specified memory area DT30 and the higher16 bits are stored in the area following the specified area DT31 Description Multiplies the 4 digit BCD equivalent constant or 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data specified by S1 and S2 The multiplied result is stored in D 1 and D Multiplicand data S1 Multiplier data S2 Multiplied result D 1 D The multiplied result is stored in the 8 digit area 32 bit area ...

Page 377: ...onstant or lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for multiplier D Lowest 16 bit area for 16 digit BCD data for result Operands Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 Thi...

Page 378: ...stored in D 3 D 2 D 1 and D Multiplicand data Result S1 1 S1 D 3 D 2 D 1 D S2 1 S2 Multiplier data The multiplied result is stored in the 64 bit area 16 digit BCD When processing 8 digit BCD data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified The areas D 3 D 2 D 1 other than the lowest 16 bit area D are automatically determined when t...

Page 379: ... bit area for BCD data for quotient Remainder is stored in special data register DT9015 or DT90015 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot...

Page 380: ...ea for 4 digit BCD data specified by S1 is divided by the 4 digit BCD equivalent constant or the 16 bit area for 4 digit BCD data specified by S2 The quotient is stored in the area specified by D and the remainder is stored in a special data register DT9015 DT90015 for FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Dividend data Quotient S1 D S2 Divisor Remainder DT9015 DT90015 With the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ F...

Page 381: ...sor D Lower 16 bit area for 8 digit BCD data for quotient Remainder is stored in special data registers DT9016 and DT9015 or DT90016 and DT90015 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This ...

Page 382: ...git S1 1 higher 4 digit D lower 4 digit D 1 higher 4 digit S2 lower 4 digit S2 1 higher 4 digit Divisor Remainder DT9015 DT90015 DT9016 DT90016 When processing 8 digit BCD data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 D 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 D are specified With the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SHand FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 FP e the numbers of the special dat...

Page 383: ...x modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Adds 1 to the contents of data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Original data D H9 BCD 1 Result D H10 BCD B...

Page 384: ... use of the F56 DB 1 instruction 8 digit BCD data increment is recommended If an overflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data is not BCD data flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculate...

Page 385: ... EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Adds 1 to the contents 8 digit BCD data of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Contents of DT1 Higher 16 bits Lower 16...

Page 386: ... an overflow to occur If an overflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data is not BCD data flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Turns on...

Page 387: ...difier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Subtracts 1 from the contents of data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Original data D H10 BCD 1 Result D H9 BC...

Page 388: ...flow useof theF58 DB 1 instruction 8 digitBCDdatadecrement is recommended If an underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data is not BCD data flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculate...

Page 389: ...EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Subtracts 1 from the contents 8 digit BCD data of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R0 turns on Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits 1 ...

Page 390: ...low an underflow to occur If an underflow occurs the carry flag special internal relay R9009 will turn on Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data is not BCD data flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Tur...

Page 391: ...ST R 0 AN R 900C OT Y 12 S1 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area to be compared S2 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area to be compared Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 T...

Page 392: ... S1 and S2 Comparison between Flag Comparison between S1 and S2 R900A flag R900B flag R900C flag R9009 carry flag S1 S2 off off on S1 S2 off on off off S1 S2 on off off turns on or off according to the conditions Execution condition Trigger In this program example the comparison will be performed only when R0 turns on If ongoing comparison is necessary relay R9010 which is always on should be used...

Page 393: ... each comparison instruction by employing output relays or internal relays Example Compares DT0 with K100 and DT1 with K200 Y10 Y11 Y12 R0 R0 R0 R0 F60 CMP DT 0 K 100 R900A R900B R900C Y13 Y14 Y15 R1 R1 R1 R1 F60 CMP DT 1 K 200 R900A R900B R900C b c a d The comparison result for a is output to the output relays Y10 Y11 and Y12 of program b The comparison result for c is output to the output relays...

Page 394: ...tween Flag Comparison between S1 and S2 R900A flag R900B flag R900C flag R9009 carry flag S1 S2 off on S1 S2 off on off off S1 S2 off off turns on or off according to the conditions For example when S1 H8000 and S2 H1000 R900A will turn off and R900C will turn on For this reason the correct comparison result will not be obtained in a program which uses R900A and R900C S1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 395: ... R 0 AN R 900C OT Y 12 S1 32 bit equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data to be compared S2 32 bit equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data to be compared Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A 1 Thi...

Page 396: ...Comparison between Flag Comparison between S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 R900A flag R900B flag R900C flag R9009 carry flag S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 off off on S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 off on off off S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 on off off turns on or off according to the conditions When processing 32 bit data the higher 16 bit areas S1 1 S2 1 are automatically determined once the lower 16 bit areas S1 S2 are specified Execution condition...

Page 397: ...nstruction by employing output relays or internal relays Example Compares DT1 and DT0 with DT11 and DT10 and DT3 and DT2 with DT21 and DT20 Y11 Y12 X0 X0 X0 X0 F61 DCMP DT 0 DT 10 R900A R900B R900C Y14 Y15 X1 X1 X1 X1 F61 DCMP DT 2 DT 20 R900A R900B R900C a b c d Y13 Y10 The comparison result for a is output to the output relays Y10 Y11 and Y12 of program b The comparison result for c is output to...

Page 398: ... or unsigned 32 bit data 0 to FFFFFFFF Comparison between Flag Comparison between S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 R900A flag R900B flag R900C flag R9009 carry flag S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 off on S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 off on off off S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 off off turns on or off according to the conditions For example if an F61 DCMP instruction is executed when S1 H80000000 K 2147483648 and S2 H10000001 K 268435457 the result will...

Page 399: ... Y 11 ST R 0 AN R 900C OT Y 12 S1 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area to be compared S2 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area for lower limit S3 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area for upper limit Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A...

Page 400: ...bit data specified by S1 with the data band specified by S2 and S3 This instruction checks whether S1 is in the data band between S2 lower limit and S3 upper limit larger than S3 or smaller than S2 The comparison result is output to special internal relays R9009 R900A R900B and R900C The following table lists the states of the R9009 R900A R900B and R900C Comparison between Flag Comparison between ...

Page 401: ...uivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data to be compared S2 32 bit equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data for lower limit S3 32 bit equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data for upper limit Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A ...

Page 402: ...ecified by S1 with the data band specified by S2 and S3 This instruction checks whether S1 is in the data band between S2 lower limit and S3 upper limit larger than S3 or smaller than S2 The comparison result is output to the special internal relays R9009 R900A R900B and R900C The following table lists the states of the R9009 R900A R900B and R900C Comparison between Flag Comparison between S1 1 S1...

Page 403: ... compared S2 Starting 16 bit area to be compared S3 Starting 16 bit area to be compared Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S3 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot...

Page 404: ...2 with the contents of the data block specified by S3 according to content specified by S1 When the comparison result is S2 S3 special internal relay R900B flag turns on S1 is the control data that determines factors such as the size of the comparison How to specify control data S1 S1 specifies the starting byte position and the number of bytes to be compared using 4 digit BCD data as follows S1 H...

Page 405: ...for the compare instruction is renewed each time a compare instruction is executed Accordingly The program that uses R900B should be just after the F64 BCMP instruction Output to an output relay or internal relay and save the result F64 BCMP DT 0 DT 1 WR 5 R0 Y30 R0 R900B Result of F64 F60 CMP DT 2 K 100 R1 R2 R1 R900B Result of F60 Note As shown in the above program be sure to have the comparison...

Page 406: ...High level Instructions 3 142 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 407: ... A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Performs AND operation on each bit in data registers DT10 and DT20 wh...

Page 408: ... the 16 bit data AND operation The AND operation is shown below S1 S2 D 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognize...

Page 409: ...A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Performs OR operation on each bit in data registers DT10 and DT20 when...

Page 410: ... the 16 bit data OR operation The OR operation is shown below S1 S2 D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized ...

Page 411: ... A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Performs exclusive OR operation on each bit in data registers DT10 and DT20...

Page 412: ...qual all the bits of the data specified by D become 0 Exclusive OR operation The exclusive OR operation is shown below S1 S2 D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on...

Page 413: ...A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example When the trigger R0 is on if the values of the bits for the same positions with regard to the contents of data regi...

Page 414: ... all the bits of the data specified by D become 1 Exclusive NOR operation The exclusive NOR operation is shown below 0 0 S1 S2 D 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on f...

Page 415: ...nd Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example DT10 1010 1010 1010 1010 DT20 ...

Page 416: ...ored in the D When S3 is HFFFF the contents of S1 stored in the D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax ...

Page 417: ...nt Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ...

Page 418: ...C 16 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 1 If CRC 16 is specified as the calculation method ASCII code cannot be specified for the conversion data How to specify control data S1 Note 2 This can be used with the FP0R FP X V2 00 or more and FPΣ V3 10 or more How to calculate the Block Check Code BCC If BCC calculation method specified by S1 is CRC The following generation polynomial is used and calculated The...

Page 419: ...area as shown below ASCII HEX code Data register ASCII character DT6 DT5 0 0 DT4 0 0 DT3 X S 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 5 8 5 3 DT2 C R DT1 1 DT0 0 4 3 5 2 2 3 3 1 3 0 2 5 Block Check Code BCC 12 bytes The F70 BCC instruction is as shown below F70 BCC K 2 DT 0 K 12 DT 6 S1 Exclusive logical OR S2 Start of target data S3 Length of target data D Calculation results When this is executed BCC H 1D is stored in t...

Page 420: ...II HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 1 0 5 1 0 0 1 3 1 S ASCII HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 1 0 5 1 1 0 0 8 0 X ASCII HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASCII HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASCII HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASCII HEX code ASCII BIN code 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Exclusive ORing Exclusive ORing Exclusive ORing Exclusive ORing Exclusive ORing Exclusive O...

Page 421: ...ted and is added at the end of the message Calculation method Addition conversion data Binary data Calculation method Addition conversion data ASCII codes Calculation method Addition conversion data ASCII codes Calculation method CRC conversion data Binary data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 422: ...s to be converted D Starting 16 bit area for storing ASCII code destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used wi...

Page 423: ...converted Since ASCII code requires eight bits one byte to express one hexadecimal character the data length when converted to ASCII code becomes double the source data Precautions during programming The two characters that make up one byte are interchanged when stored Two bytes are converted as one segment of data 4 2 4 1 A B C D 4 4 4 3 B A D C Hexadecimal data Converted result S1 S1 1 D 1 D D 2...

Page 424: ... B A Conversion of three bytes of data S2 K3 Since byte is specified as the unit it is possible to convert only the last byte of the data for one word if desired 12 AB CD S1 1 S1 Hexadecimal data 3 bytes 32 31 42 41 D 1 D Converted result D 2 44 43 2 1 D C B A F71 HEXA instruction execution ASCII HEX codes to express hexadecimal characters Hexadecimal number ASCII HEX code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B ...

Page 425: ...e converted D Starting 16 bit area for storing converted data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with...

Page 426: ...imal numeric data is half that of the converted ASCII code Precautions during programming The data for two ASCII code characters is converted to two numeric digits for one word When this takes place the characters of the upper and lower bytes are interchanged Four characters are converted as one segment of data ASCII code character A B C D 4 2 4 1 4 4 4 3 Converted result Flag conditions Σ Error f...

Page 427: ... ASCII code 7 characters 7 bytes D 1 D Converted result 31 46 45 44 43 42 41 1 F E D C B A 10 EF CD AB This position is filled with 0 F72 AHEX instruction execution Conversion of 6 characters S2 K6 S1 2 S1 1 S1 ASCII code 6 characters 6 bytes D 1 D Converted result 46 45 44 43 42 41 F E D C B A EF CD AB Result of S1 1 S1 conversion Result of S1 2 conversion F72 AHEX instruction execution Note In t...

Page 428: ...e of the converted results 44 n n 1 n 2 n 0 n 1 n 2 n S2 odd number ASCII code Converted result This position is filled with 0 Converted result ASCII HEX code Hexadecimal characters ASCII HEX code Hexadecimal characters H30 H31 H32 H33 H34 H35 H36 H37 H38 H39 H41 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 429: ...arrange the converted data D Starting 16 bit area for storing conversion result destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This c...

Page 430: ...ion DT0 BCD data DT11 ASCII HEX code 1 2 3 4 3 4 3 3 ASCII character 4 3 DT10 3 2 3 1 2 1 Description Converts the BCD code starting from the 16 bit area specified by S1 to ASCII code that expresses the equivalentdecimals as specified by S2 The convertedresult is stored in the area starting from the 16 bit area specified by D A maximum of four bytes 8 figure of data can be converted S2 specifies t...

Page 431: ... characters that make up one byte are interchanged when stored Two bytes are converted as one segment of data 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 S1 D 1 D S1 D 1 D Normal direction Reverse direction 2 1 4 3 4 3 2 1 Converted result Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data specifi...

Page 432: ...code ASCII character F73 BCDA instruction execution Reverse direction convertion of 4 bytes S2 H1004 Result of S1 1 conversion Result of S1 conversion ASCII HEX code BCD data 4 bytes D 1 Converted result D 3 D 2 BCD H code ASCII character 12 34 56 78 S1 1 S1 34 33 36 35 38 37 32 31 4 3 6 5 8 7 2 1 D F73 BCDA instruction execution ASCII HEX code to express BCD character BCD character ASCII HEX code...

Page 433: ...nd to arrange converted data D Starting 16 bit area for storing converted data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This ca...

Page 434: ... 1 2 3 4 3 4 3 3 ASCII character 4 3 DT0 3 2 3 1 2 1 Description Converts ASCII codes that express decimal characters starting from the 16 bit area specified by S1 to BCD data as specified by S2 The converted result is stored in the area starting from the 16 bit area specified by D A maximum of eight characters of data can be converted S2 specifies the number of source data bytes and the direction...

Page 435: ...gment of data The converted results are stored in byte units If an odd number of characters is being converted 0 will be entered for bit position 0 to 3 of the final data byte of the converted results if data is sequenced in the normal direction and 0 will be entered for bit position 4 to 7 if data is being sequenced in the reverse direction Normal direction Reverse direction 2 1 4 3 4 3 2 1 BCD d...

Page 436: ... H36 H37 H38 H39 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit ASCII code not corresponding to decimal numbers 0 to 9 is specified The number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the area specified by S1 The converted result exceeds the area specified by D T...

Page 437: ...ress destination data ASCII codes D Starting 16 bit area for storing ASCII codes destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot b...

Page 438: ...g programming If a positive number is converted the sign is not converted When a negative number is converted the sign is also converted to ASCII code ASCII HEX code H2D If the area specified by S2 is more than that required by the converted data the ASCII code for SPACE ASCII HEX code H20 is stored in the extra area Data is stored in the direction towards the final address so the position of the ...

Page 439: ...a Space Space F75 BINA instruction execution When a positive number is converted Converted result D 2 D 1 D ASCII code Extra bytes Range specified by S2 6 bytes S1 16 bit data Space Space 21 32 2 1 33 34 4 3 20 20 K1234 D2 04 F75 BINA instruction execution Decimal characters to express ASCII HEX code Decimal characters ASCII HEX code SPACE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 H20 H2D H30 H31 H32 H33 H34 H35 H36 H3...

Page 440: ...g the index modifier exceeds the limit The number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the area specified by D The data specified by S2 is recognized as 0 The converted result exceeds the area specified by D The number of bytes of converted result exceeds the number of bytes specified by S2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 441: ... 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Converts ASCII codes 6 byte...

Page 442: ...onverted The codes can be omitted Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the area specified by S1 The data specified by S2 is recognized as 0 The converted result exceeds the 16 bit area specified by D The converted result ...

Page 443: ...SCII code Extra bytes Range specified by S2 Space Space S1 2 S1 1 S1 ASCII code Converted result of example 1 or 2 20 31 1 30 30 0 0 20 20 D K100 64 00 Space F76 ABIN instruction execution ASCII HEX code to express decimal characters ASCII HEX code Decimal characters H20 H2B H2D H30 H31 H32 H33 H34 H35 H36 H37 H38 H39 SPACE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com...

Page 444: ...used to express destination data ASCII codes D Starting 16 bit area for storing ASCII codes destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 ...

Page 445: ...ASCII code ASCII HEX code H2D If the area specified by S2 is more than that required by the converted data the ASCII code for SPACE ASCII HEX code H20 is stored in the extra area Data is stored in the direction of the last address so the position of the ASCII code may change dependingon the size of the data storage area If the number of bytes of ASCII codes following conversion including the minus...

Page 446: ...8 43 FF Converted result Space F77 DBIA instruction execution Example of converting a positive number D 2 D 1 D ASCII code Range specified by S2 8 bytes S1 32 bit data S1 1 D 3 Converted result 33 34 2 1 35 36 4 3 4E 61 K12345678 37 38 6 5 8 7 31 32 BC 00 F77 DBIA instruction execution Decimal characters to express ASCII HEX code Decimal characters ASCII HEX code SPACE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 H20 H2B ...

Page 447: ... 3 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts ASCII codes 10 bytes that express decimal digits in data registers DT4...

Page 448: ...lag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the area specified by S1 The data specified by S2 is recognized as 0 The converted result exceeds the area specified by D The converted result exceeds the 32 bit data ASCII code not cor...

Page 449: ...ode Extra byte Range specified by S2 10 bytes S1 3 S1 4 Converted result of example 1 or 2 D ASCII code D 1 Space 2B 31 32 33 20 34 35 36 37 38 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 8 K12345678 4E 61 BC 00 F78 DABI instruction execution ASCII HEX code to express decimal characters ASCII HEX code Decimal characters H20 H2B H2D H30 H31 H32 H33 H34 H35 H36 H37 H38 H39 SPACE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723...

Page 450: ... bit area for 4 digit BCD data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH t...

Page 451: ...0 0 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 0 0 4 1 3 0 1 1 0 0 BCD H code 0 0 1 6 Description Converts the 16 bit binary data specified by S to BCD code that expresses a 4 digit decimal The converted data is stored in D Precautions during programming The maximum value of 16 bit binary data that can be converted to BCD code is K9999 H270F Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 ...

Page 452: ...r storing 16 bit binary data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A K A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH thi...

Page 453: ...nversion to binary data Destination D K15 Decimal K15 Bit position DT10 15 0 0 0 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 0 0 4 1 3 0 1 0 0 1 BCD H code 0 0 1 5 Description Converts BCD code that expresses a 4 digit decimal specified by S to 16 bit binary data The converted data is stored in D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified...

Page 454: ... A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts the contents of data registers DT11 and DT10 to BCD code that expresses an 8 digit decimal when trigger R20 turns on The converted data is stored in data re...

Page 455: ... Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit When the range that binary data can be BCD converted is exceeded When minus or when K99999999 is exceeded Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 456: ... This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts BCD code that expresses an 8 digit decimal of data registers DT11 and DT10 to 32 bit binary data when trigger R20 turns on The converted data is stored in data registers DT21 and DT20 Description Converts BCD...

Page 457: ... the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Inverts the contents of data register DT0 when trigger R20 turns on Bit position DT0 15 0 1 0 12 1 11 1 1 1 8 0 7 1 0 1 4 1 3 1 1 0 0 1 Destination R20 on inversion Bit position DT0 15 1 0 1 12 0 11 0 0 0 8 1 7 0 1 0 4 0 3 0 0 1 0 0 Destination Description Inverts each bit 0 or 1 of the 16 bit data specified by D This instru...

Page 458: ...ifier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Takes two s complement of data register DT0 when trigger R20 turns on Bit position DT0 15 1 1 12 1 11 1 8 7 1 4 3 0 1...

Page 459: ... useful for changing the sign of 16 bit data from positive to negative or from negative to positive Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrw...

Page 460: ... the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Takes two s complement of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R20 turns on Bit position Binary data 15 0 1211 0 0 8 0 7 0 0 4 0 3 0 0 R20 on Destination Decimal data 15 0 12 0 11 0 8 0 7 0 4 0 3 0 1 0 1 Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit are...

Page 461: ... useful for changing the sign of 32 bit data from positive to negative or from negative to positive Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrw...

Page 462: ... X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Takes absolute value of data register DT0 when trigger R20 turns on For instance regardless of whether the value of DT0 is K1 or K 1 it will be K1 when the instruction is executed Description Takes absolute value of signed 16 bit data specified by D The absolute value of the signed 16 bit data is stored in D This is effective for processing...

Page 463: ... FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Takes absolute value of data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger R20 turns on The absolute value of DT1 and DT0 is stored in data registers DT1 and DT0 Description Takes the absolutevalueof signed32 bit data specifiedby D The absolutevalueof the 32 bit datais storedin D 1 and D This is effective for processing data in which the polarity or changes Fla...

Page 464: ...F 89 EXT DT 0 D 16 bit area for storing original 16 bit binary data Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this i...

Page 465: ... bit data is converted to 32 bit data without signs and values being changed If the sign bit bit position 15 of the 16 bitdata specified by D is 0 all 16 bits of the next area of D will be set to 0 If the sign bit is 1 all 16 bits will be set to 1 By doing this the 16 bit data is converted to 32 bit data without the sign or the values changing Doubleword datawith D as thefirst datacan beused asthe...

Page 466: ... A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Decodes data register DT10 according to the n H404 when trigger R20 turns on The decoded result is...

Page 467: ... specifies the starting bit position and the number of bits to be decoded using hexadecimal data Number of bits to be decoded set range H0 to H8 Starting bit position to be decoded set range H0 to HF Set value Number of bits H0 0 H1 1 H2 2 H3 3 H4 4 H5 5 H6 6 H7 7 H8 8 Set value Starting bit position H0 0 H1 1 H2 2 H3 3 H4 4 H5 5 H6 6 H7 7 H8 8 H9 9 HA 10 HB 11 HC 12 HD 13 HE 14 HF 15 n 15 12 11 0...

Page 468: ...o be decoded Decoded result Data to be decoded Binary decimal 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 0000 K0 0001 K1 0010 K2 0011 K3 0100 K4 0101 K5 0110 K6 0111 K7 1000 K8 1001 K9 1010 K10 1011 K11 1100 K12 1101 K13 1110 K14 1111 K15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 469: ...ng the index modifier exceeds the limit The number of bits to be decoded is outside the range of 1 to 8 The sum of the number of bits to be decoded and the starting bit position to be decoded is outside the range of 1 to 16 The last data area for the decoded result exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 470: ... N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Converts the contents of data register DT0 to 4 digit data for 7 segment indication when trigger R20 turns on The converted data is stored in word i...

Page 471: ...0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 H1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 H2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 LSB H3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 a H4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 b H5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 c a H6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 d a b f H7 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 e b f g H8 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f c e H9 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 g c d e HA 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 d HB 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 MSB HC 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 HD 1 1 0 1 0...

Page 472: ... encoded D 16 bit area for storing encoded data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R F...

Page 473: ... 8th bit of 32 bit data is in the on state 32 bits specified by H5 The encoded result K8 decimal is stored in DT20 Bit position 8 to 15 are filled with 0 Encoded result K8 Starting bit position Description Encodesthe contents of data specifiedby S accordingto the contents of n The encodedresult is stored in the 16 bit area specified by D starting from the specified bit position If more than one bi...

Page 474: ...estina tion data to be encoded set range H0 to HF Set value Number of bits 2 H1 4 H2 8 1 byte H3 16 1 word H4 32 2 words H5 64 4 words H6 128 8 words H7 256 16 words H8 Set value Starting bit position H0 0 H1 1 H2 2 H3 3 H4 4 H5 5 H6 6 H7 7 H8 8 H9 9 HA 10 HB 11 HC 12 HD 13 HE 14 HF 15 The bits of mark are invalid 16 bit data 15 12 11 0 0 0 8 0 7 4 3 0 0 0 Bit position n 0 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax...

Page 475: ...0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K0 0 0 0 1 K1 0 0 1 0 K2 0 0 1 1 K3 0 1 0 0 K4 0 1 0 1 K5 0 1 1 0 K6 0 1 1 1 K7 1 0 0 0 K8 1 0 0 1 K9 1 0 1 0 K10 1 0 1 1 K11 1 1 0 0 K12 1 1 0 1 K13 1 1 1 0 K14 1 1 1 1 K15 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns...

Page 476: ...y number of data to be extracted D 16 bit area for storing combined data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used...

Page 477: ...ord The result is stored in the 16 bit area specified by D n specifies the number of data areas to be extracted range of n K0 to K4 When K0 is specified for n this instruction is not executed When n K4 0 is automatically set to positions at D where the corresponding 16 bit source data does not exist Bit position S 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 Bit positions 4 to 15 of each data area are invalid Destination So...

Page 478: ...r 16 bit area to specify number of data to be divided D Starting 16 bit area for storing divided data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and F...

Page 479: ... the divided data into the lower 4 bits bit positions 0 to 3 of 16 bit areas starting from D n specifies the number of data divisions range of n K0 to K4 When K0 is specified for n this instruction is not executed Bit position D 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bit positions 4 to 15 are filled with 0s Destination Source D 1 D 2 Bit position S 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 4 Digit 3 Di...

Page 480: ...N A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts the character constants ABC1230_DEF to ASCII code when trigger R20 turns on The ASCII code is stored in data registers DT2 to DT7 ASCII HEX c...

Page 481: ...character constant A F95 ASC MA DT 2 R20 H20 DT2 H41 A H20 DT3 H20 H20 DT5 H20 H20 DT4 H20 H20 DT6 H20 H20 DT7 H20 Higher byte Lower byte S MA 11 spaces R20 on F95 ASC M A DT 2 R20 H20 DT2 H41 A H20 DT3 H20 H20 DT5 H20 H20 DT4 H20 H20 DT6 H20 H20 DT7 H20 Higher byte Lower byte S M 11 spaces R20 on A F95 ASC M A DT 2 R20 H20 DT2 H41 A H20 DT3 H20 H20 DT5 H20 H20 DT4 H20 H20 DT6 H20 H20 DT7 H20 High...

Page 482: ... 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 b3 b2 b1 b0 b6 b5 b4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Least significant digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ASCII HEX code b4 b5 b6 Most significant digit SPACE DEL LF VT FF CR SO SI DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H ...

Page 483: ...High level Instructions 3 219 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 484: ...ck S3 Ending 16 bit area of the block Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX 3 IY 4 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S3 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 Wit...

Page 485: ...FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90038 Description Searches for values matching S1 in the block of 16 bit areas specified by S2 starting area through S3 ending area When the search operation is performed the search results are stored as follows The number of data items that match S1 is stored in special data register DT9037 with the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90037 Th...

Page 486: ...r 32 bit area to store the searched value in S2 Starting 32 bit area of the block S3 Ending 32 bit area of the block Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H Index modifier Integer device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A N A S2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S3 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A 1 This cann...

Page 487: ...0 is stored in special data register DT90038 Description Searches for values matching S1 in the block of 32 bit areas specified by S2 starting area through S3 ending area when the trigger turns on When the search operation is performed the search results are stored as follows The number of data items that match S1 is stored in special data register DT90037 The position of the first matching data i...

Page 488: ...R 0 F 98 CMPR DT 0 DT 5 DT 10 D1 Starting 16 bit area of the data table D2 Ending 16 bit area of the data table D3 16 bit area for storing the shift out data Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D3 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A...

Page 489: ...ollows Contents of D2 highest address is shifted out to the area specified by D3 Non zero data is shifted compressed in sequential order in the direction of the higher address in the specified range D1 K3 0 K2 0 K1 D2 D1 0 0 0 K3 K2 D2 K1 D3 Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be the same type of operand Be sure to specify D1 and D2 with D1 D2 If all data in the data table specified by D1 a...

Page 490: ...PCMPR instruction When the data in the last address of the buffer the area of the specified range has been read data can be extracted in sequential order starting from the oldest data The rest of the data in the buffer is shifted in the direction of the first address so normally the oldest data at that point is stored in the last address of the buffer 0 0 0 44 555 11 31 0 0 0 31 44 555 0 11 555 F9...

Page 491: ...shift in data D1 Starting 16 bit area of the data table D2 Ending 16 bit area of the data table Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 IX 2 IY 3 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2...

Page 492: ...ified by D1 and D2 is rearranged as follows Data specified by S is shifted in to the area specified by D1 starting address Non zero data is shifted compressed in sequential order in the direction of the higher address in the specified range K4 D1 K3 K0 K2 K0 K1 D2 D1 K0 K0 K4 K2 K1 D2 D3 Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be the same type of operand Be sure to specify D1 and D2 with D1 D2 ...

Page 493: ...98 PCMPR instruction When the data in the last address of the buffer the area of the specified range has been read data can be extracted in sequential order starting from the oldest data The rest of the data in the buffer is shifted in the direction of the first address so normally the oldest data at that point is stored in the last address of the buffer 11 0 0 0 44 555 11 31 0 0 0 31 44 555 0 555...

Page 494: ...A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Shifts 4 bits in data register DT0 to the right when trigger R0 turns on The data in bit position 3 is transferred to special internal relay R9009 ...

Page 495: ...al relay R9009 carry flag The n is effective only for the lower 8 bits of the 16 bit data The amount of the shift can be specified within a range of 1 bit to 255 bits n Upper 8 bits are invalid K0 to K255 H00 to HFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on fo...

Page 496: ... A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Shifts 4 bits in data register DT0 to the left when trigger R0 turns on The data in bit position 12 is transferred to special internal relay R90...

Page 497: ...ternal relay R9009 carry flag The n is effective only for the lower 8 bits of the 16 bit data The amount of the shift can be specified within a range of 1 bit to 255 bits n Upper 8 bits are invalid K0 to K255 H00 to HFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns o...

Page 498: ... shifted to the right n 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area specifies number of shifted bits Range of n K0 to K255 H0 to HFF Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the F...

Page 499: ... the shift within the range 1 to 255 bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 K0 to K255 H00 to HFF n Upper 8 bits are invalid When n is specified using K0 the contents of D and D 1 and the special internal relay R9009 carry flag do not change When n is specified using K32 or higher the contents of D and D 1 change to 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the inde...

Page 500: ...R WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Description Shifts n bits of the 32 bit area specified by D to the left to the higher bit position when the trigger turns on 15 00000000 0 n bits CY 0 15 D 1 D n bits starting from bit position 0 are filled with 0...

Page 501: ...s specified using K32 or higher the contents of D and D 1 change to 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Carry flag R9009 Content in the nth from LSB least significant bit turns on for an instant when the ...

Page 502: ... this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Shifts one hexadecimal digit 4 bits in data register DT0 to the right when trigger R0 turns on The data in hexadecimal digit position 1 bit positions 0 to 3 is shifted out and transferred to the lower digit position bit positions 0 to 3 of special data register DT9014 with the FP0 T32 FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2...

Page 503: ...e right The data in hexadecimal digit position 1 bit positions 0 to 3 of the 16 bit area specified by D is shifted out and is transferred to the lower digit bit positions 0 to 3 of special data register DT9014 with the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90014 The hexadecimal digit 4 bit positions 12 to 15 of the 16 bit area specified by D becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns ...

Page 504: ...s is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Shifts one hexadecimal digit 4 bits in data register DT0 to the left when trigger R0 turns on The data in hexadecimal digit position 4 bit positions 12 to 15 is shifted out and transferred to the lower digit position bit positions 0 to 3 of special data register DT9014 with the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 F...

Page 505: ...ft The data in hexadecimal digit position 4 bit positions 12 to 15 of the 16 bit data specified by D is shifted out and is transferred to the lower digit bit positions 0 to 3 of special data register DT9014 with the FP0 T32 FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90014 The hexadecimal digit position 1 bit positions 0 to 3 of the 16 bit data specified by D becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Tu...

Page 506: ... Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Shifts 4 bits in data range 3 words from DT10 through DT12 to the rig...

Page 507: ... D2 When n bits are shifted to the right The n bits of starting 16 bit area D1 are shifted out The n bits in the ending 16 bit area D2 becomes 0 0 to 15 can be specified for n When 0 is specified no operation takes place Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit D1 D2 The n...

Page 508: ...r Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Shifts 4 bits in the data range 3 words from DT10 through DT12 to the left when tr...

Page 509: ...nd D1 D2 When n bits are shifted to the left The n bits of ending 16 bit area D2 is shifted out The n bits in the starting 16 bit area D1 becomes 0 0 to 15 can be specified for n When 0 is specified no operation takes place Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit D1 D2 Th...

Page 510: ...T LD 1 FL 2 I K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Explanation of example Shifts one word 16 bits of the data range 3 words from DT0 through DT2 to the right when trigger R0 turns on Data register Hexadecimal DT2 0 2 1 2 0 0 3 DT1 0 0 2 3 DT0 2 D...

Page 511: ... D1 D2 D1 Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be The same type of operand D1 D2 When one word 16 bits is shifted to the right The starting word D1 is shifted out The data in the ending word D2 becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit D1 D2 Phone 800 894 04...

Page 512: ... EV DT LD 1 FL 2 I K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Explanation of example Shiftsoneword 16bits ofthedatarange 3words fromDT0 throughDT2 tothe leftwhentriggerR0turnson The data in DT2 is shifted out Data register Hexadecimal Hexadecimal DT2 0...

Page 513: ...ifted out Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be The same type of operand D1 D2 When one word 16 bits is shifted to the left The ending word D2 is shifted out The data in the starting word D1 becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit D1 D2 Phone 800 894 041...

Page 514: ... A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Explanation of example Shifts one hexadecimal digit 4 bits of the data range 10 words from DT0 through DT9 to the right when trigger R0 turns on 0 2 R0 on The data 2 in the lower hexadecimal digit bit positions 0 to 3 is shifted out Specified data range 10 words 40 digits ...

Page 515: ...becomes 0 Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be The same type of operand D1 D2 When the hexadecimal digit 4 bits is shifted to the right The data at the lower hexadecimal digit bit positions 0 to 3 of the 16 bit data specified by D1 is shifted out The data at the higher hexadecimal digit bit positions 12 to 15 in the 16 bit data specified by D2 becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Tu...

Page 516: ...N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X Explanation of example Shifts one hexadecimal digit 4 bits of the data range 10 words from DT0 through DT9 to the left when trigger R0 turns on 0 2 R0 on The data 0 in the higher hexadecimal digit bit positions 12 to 15 is shifted out Specified data range 10 words 40 ...

Page 517: ...s shifted out Starting area D1 and ending area D2 should be The same type of operand D1 D2 When the hexadecimal digit 4 bits is shifted to the left The data at the higher hexadecimal digit bit positions 12 to 15 of the 16 bit data specified by D2 is shifted out The data at the lower hexadecimal digit bit positions 0 to 3 in the 16 bit data specified by D1 becomes 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007...

Page 518: ...and FP X 2 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example When the execution condition trigger R0 is on the area headed by DT0 is defined in the FIFO buffer area The size of the FIFO buffer K256 is stored in DT0 the number of data items stored is stored in DT1 with a default value of K0 and the FIFO point...

Page 519: ... 0 Kn D D 1 D 2 15 0 D 3 D 2 n n 2 n 1 0 1 15 0 Reading pointer 0 to 255 H00 to HFF Writing pointer 0 to 255 H00 to HFF 0 Data storage area n words Memory size of FIFO buffer n Number of stored data items words FIFO pointer When the F115 FIFT instruction is executed the following are stored as default values D n the value specified by the F115 FIFT instruction D 1 K0 and D 2 H0000 Flag conditions ...

Page 520: ...r storing data read from FIFO buffer Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 IX 2 IY 3 K H Index modifier S N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2S...

Page 521: ... number of stored data items and the reading pointer moves to 3 The next time that reading is carried out the contents of DT100 are sent to DT6 indicated by the 3 Description These instructions read data from the FIFO buffer headed by the area specified by S and store it in the area specified by D S should specify the beginning of the FIFO buffer defined by the F115 FIFT instruction Reading of dat...

Page 522: ...en the reading pointer is not equal to the writing pointer If this is executed when the reading pointer is indicating the final address in the FIFO buffer the n defined by the FIFO instruction minus 1 the reading pointer is set to 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit...

Page 523: ...e Data should be written using the F117 FIFW instruction and read using the F116 FIFR instruction Writing data When data is written the data items are stored in sequential order starting from the first data storage area The writing pointer indicates the next area to which data is to be written If the data storage area becomes full further data writing is inhibited Reading data Whendatais read data...

Page 524: ...te in FIFO buffer D Starting 16 bit area of FIFO buffer Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 IX 2 IY 3 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 3 With the FP0R FPΣ ...

Page 525: ...7 4 K 5 K 4 K100 K102 K103 4 DT5 F117 FIFW execution DT110 DT110 K103 Writing K103 Writing pointer Number of stored data items Writing pointer moved Writing pointer The contents 103 of DT110 are sent to DT6 which is indicated by the pointer 3 After the data has been written 1 is added to the contents of DT1 the number of stored data items and the writing pointer moves to 4 The next time that writi...

Page 526: ...s of the third word of the FIFO buffer area and is indicated by a relative position in the data storage area The actual address is the value of the leading address in the FIFO buffer area specified by D plus 3 plus the value of writing pointer the value of which only the lower byte is a decimal value When the writing is executed 1 is added to the number of stored data items and the writing pointer...

Page 527: ...be done only once before reading or writing is done Data should be written using the F117 FIFW instruction and read using the F116 FIFR instruction Writing data When data is written the data items are stored in sequential order starting from the first data storage area The writing pointer indicates the next area to which data is to be written If the data storage area becomes full further data writ...

Page 528: ... 3 DT7 4 K 5 K 4 K101 K102 K103 4 DT5 0 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT6 0 1 2 3 DT7 4 K 5 K 5 K100 K102 K103 0 DT5 Execution of F117 FIFW instruction Writing pointer shifts WR0 Number of stored data Writing pointer K104 K104 Reading pointer Writing When the F117 FIFW instruction is executed after data is written to the final address 4 in the buffer the writing pointer becomes the first address 0 Phone 800...

Page 529: ...2 3 DT7 4 K 5 K 5 K100 K102 K103 0 DT5 Execution of F117 FIFW instruction WR0 K105 K104 K104 An error occurs and processing is not carried out Writing pointer 1 cycle Writing Because the number of data items stored in the FIFO buffer DT1 5 exceeds the size of the FIFO buffer DT0 5 the operation is not executed and an operation error occurs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Ema...

Page 530: ...qual to the number of data items stored in the buffer DT1 F115 FIFT K 5 DT0 R9010 X0 X1 F60 DT0 DT1 DF R0 F117 FIFW WR0 DT0 DF R900B R0 Execute the F117 FIFW instruction after executing the F116 FIFR instruction F115 FIFT K 5 DT0 R9010 X0 X1 F60 DT0 DT1 DF R0 F117 FIFW WR0 DT0 DF R900B R0 R9010 X2 F60 DT1 K 0 R1 F116 FIFR DT0 WY4 DF R900B R1 R0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr co...

Page 531: ...t constant or 16 bit area for counter preset value D 16 bit area for counter elapsed value Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 I K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A N A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X UP ...

Page 532: ...Description The counter is switched between an incremental count addition or decremental count subtraction by turning the relay specified for up down input on or off When the up down input is on the incremental counter 1 is effective and when it is off the decremental counter 1 is effective The elapsed value is stored in the area specified by the D The preset value in S is transferred to D when th...

Page 533: ...count input remains continuously on since counting will only take place at the rise no further counting will take place In cases where the count input is initially on such as when the mode is changed to RUN or the power is turned on with the mode set to RUN increment or decrement operation will not take place at the first scan Count intput Operation of instruction No count done Count done RUN Powe...

Page 534: ...ne bit is shifted to the left or to the right D2 Ending 16 bit area whose one bit is shifted to the left or to the right Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 IX IY K H Index modifier D1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A D2 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This ...

Page 535: ...t R1 turns off 0 is shifted into bit position 15 Description This shift register changes direction either left direction of MSB or right direction of LSB in which a shift of one bit is made based on the on off status of the relay specified by the left right shift input The shift operation is made to the left when the left right shift input is on and to the right when off Specify D1 and D2 so they ...

Page 536: ...ere the shift input is initially on such as when the mode is changed to RUN or when the power is turned on with the mode set to RUN a shift will not take place at the first scan Shift input Operation of instruction No shift made Shift made RUN Power on When you use the F119 LRSR instruction with one of the followinginstructions that changes the order of the execution of instructions be aware that ...

Page 537: ...High level Instructions 3 273 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 538: ... IY 4 K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data register DT0 to the right when trigger R0 tur...

Page 539: ... the lower 8 bits in the 16 bit data are valid 15 0 n Range of n K0 to K255 H00 to HFF Upper 8 bits are invalid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Precaution during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 16 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K16 same operation as n K0 The carry flag does not change either n K17 same operation as n K1 n K32 same operation as n K0 The carry flag...

Page 540: ... IY 4 K H Index modifier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data register DT0 to the left when trigger R0 turn...

Page 541: ... the lower 8 bits in the 16 bit data are valid 15 0 n Range of n K0 to K255 H00 to HFF Upper 8 bits are invalid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Precaution during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 16 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K16 same operation as n K0 The carry flag does not change either n K17 same operation as n K1 n K32 same operation as n K0 The carry flag...

Page 542: ... D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data register DT0 together with carry flag data 1 to the right when trigge...

Page 543: ...ion 0 are shifted into the higher bit positions of the 16 bit data specified by D For n only the lower 8 bits in the 16 bit data are valid 15 0 n Range of n K0 to K255 H00 to HFF Upper 8 bits are invalid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Precaution during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 17 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K17 same operation as n K0 n K18 same operati...

Page 544: ...ifier D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data register DT0 together with carry flag data 1 to the left when tr...

Page 545: ...ion 15 are shifted into the lower bit positions of the 16 bit data specified by D For n only the lower 8 bits in the 16 bit data are valid 15 0 n Range of n K0 to K255 H00 to HFF Upper 8 bits are invalid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Precaution during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 17 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K17 same operation as n K0 n K18 same operati...

Page 546: ...ter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data registers DT11 and DT10 to the right when trigger R0 turns on When 4 bits are rotated to the right th...

Page 547: ...K0 to K255 H00 to HFF n Upper 8 bits are invalid When n is specified using K0 the contents of D 1 D and the special internal relay R9009 carry flag do not change Precautions during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 32 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K32 same operation as n K0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specif...

Page 548: ...Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data registers DT11 and DT10 to the left when trigger R0 turns on The data in bit position...

Page 549: ...255 H00 to HFF n Upper 8 bits are invalid When n is specified using K0 the contents of D 1 D and the special internal relay R9009 carry flag do not change Precautions during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 32 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K32 same operation as n K0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified usi...

Page 550: ...Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data registers DT11 and DT10 together with carry flag data to the right when trigger R0 turns on The data in bit position 3 is transferred to the carry flag ...

Page 551: ... the 16 bit data n are effective 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 K0 to K255 H00 to HFF n Upper 8 bits are invalid When n is specified using K0 the contents of D 1 and D and the carry flag do not change Precautions during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 33 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K33 same operation as n K0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and ...

Page 552: ...t Index Integer Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H f Index modifier Integer device D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X Explanation of example Rotates 4 bits in data registers DT11 and DT10 together with carry flag data to the left when trigger R0 turns on The data in bit position 28 is transferred to...

Page 553: ...ight bits of the 16 bit data n are effective 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 K0 to K255 H00 to HFF n Upper 8 bits are invalid When n is specified using K0 the contents of D 1 and D and the carry flag do not change Precautions during programming If the specified n is a multiple of 33 bits the data will be the same as that before the operation e g n K33 same operation as n K0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 T...

Page 554: ...A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Turns on bit position specified by DT2 in data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on When the DT2 K7 as shown below 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0...

Page 555: ...o K15 n Bit position 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 The data in bit positions 4 through 15 are invalid Range of n K0 to K15 H0 to HF Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr...

Page 556: ... A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Turns off the bit specified by DT2 of data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on When the DT2 K7 as shown below 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Bi...

Page 557: ...to K15 n Bit position 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 The data in bit positions 4 through 15 are invalid Range of n K0 to K15 H0 to HF Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwt...

Page 558: ... A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Inverts the state of bit specified by DT10 in data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on When the DT10 K7 as shown below 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit pos...

Page 559: ...inverted Range of n K0 to K15 n Bit position 15 1211 8 7 4 3 0 The data in bit positions 4 through 15 are invalid Range of n K0 to K15 H0 to HF 0 0 0 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412...

Page 560: ... A A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Checks the state on 1 or off 0 of bit specified by DT2 in data register DT0 when trigger R0 turns on If bit specif...

Page 561: ...n when the judgement flag R900B is used two or more times The judgment flag R900B is updated each time an operation instruction or comparison instruction is executed If the judgment flag is used two or more times the program in which the judgment flag is used should be input immediately following the instruction which executes the judgment the flag should be output to output relays or internal rel...

Page 562: ...4 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC 4 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is ID Explanation of example Counts the number of bits in the on 1 state in data register DT10 when t...

Page 563: ... bit area specified by D The results are stored in decimal number Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 564: ... IY K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Counts the number of bits in the on 1 state in data register DT11 and DT10 when trigger R0 turns on The number of on 1 bits...

Page 565: ... bit area specified by D The results are stored in decimal number Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 566: ...filled the auxiliary timer is activated and when the value stored in DT10 x 0 01 seconds has elapsed R5 goes on Description This functions as a 0 01 secondunit on delay timer When the execution condition trigger is on subtraction is carriedout for the specified time and whenthe elapsedvalue D reaches 0 the specialinternal relay R900D turns on The special internal relay R900D turns off when the exe...

Page 567: ...her timer or counter instructions or memory areas used for high level instruction operations Because subtraction is carried out when operations are carried out the program should be set up so that operations are carried out every scan In cases such as programs where interrupt operation is carried out or for jump or loop instructions where several operations are carried out during one scan or where...

Page 568: ...used and multiple auxiliary timers are being used always use R900D in the line following the auxiliary timer instruction R0 R900D Y10 F137 STMR DT10 DT20 R1 R900D Y11 F137 STMR DT30 DT40 Pair Pair a b When timer a which is activated by R0 turns on expires Y10 goes on When timer b which is activated by R1 turns on expires Y11 goes on Describe the program as shown below will result in incorrect oper...

Page 569: ...A A A A A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts the hour minute and second data stored in data registers DT1 and DT0 to seconds data when trigger R0 turns on The converted seconds data is sto...

Page 570: ...00 to H9999 BCD BCD 8 digits 2 words S 1 S Example 3 45 19 S 1 H0003 S H4519 Format of D 1 and D 32 bits 2 words are allocated to express the converted seconds data The converted seconds data is expressed in BCD format as follows H Converted seconds data H00000000 to H99999999 BCD BCD 8 digits 2 words D 1 D Example 35 999 999 D 1 3599 D H9999 Note The maximum time data that can be specified is 9 9...

Page 571: ...A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X 3 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example Converts the seconds data stored in data registers DT1 and DT0 to hour minute and second data when trigger R0 turns on The converted hour minute and second data...

Page 572: ...CD Example 35 999 999 S 1 H3599 S H9999 Note The maximum value that can be stored in D is 9 999 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds so the maximum value that can be specified for the time data for the seconds unit is 35 999 999 seconds Format of D 1 and D 32 bits 2 words D 1 and D are allocated to express the converted hours minutes and seconds data The converted hours 4 digits minutes 2 digits and se...

Page 573: ...when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data specified by S is not BCD data The data specified by S exceeds the set range 35 999 999 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 574: ...able Program example Ladder Diagram Boolean Ladder Diagram Address Instruction 10 F140 STC Trigger R0 10 11 ST R 0 F140 STC Description Special internal relay R9009 carry flag goes on Flag condition Carry flag R9009 Turns on when this instruction is executed F140 P140 PSTC STC Carry flag R9009 set Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 575: ...ble Program example Ladder Diagram Boolean Ladder Diagram Address Instruction 10 F141 CLC Trigger R0 10 11 ST R 0 F141 CLC Description Special internal relay R9009 carry flag goes off Flag condition Carry flag R9009 Turns off when this instruction is executed F141 P141 PCLC CLC Carry flag R9009 reset Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 576: ...time for the operation delay watching dog timer Operation processing blocks which occur after a preset specified by this instruction will be monitored at the time out time specified here S can be specified within the ranges given below K4 to K6400 The time out time is S 0 1 ms Example If S is K100 the time out time is 10ms The time out time of operation delay watching dog timer is updated at the s...

Page 577: ...tion again and enter a preset with a new value If the time required for one scan exceeds 640 ms the system watching dog timer will be activated regardless of the time out time set with the F142 WDT instruction and operation will be interrupted and output turned off If you want to reset an erroneous condition caused by the system watching dog timer clear that condition using one of the following me...

Page 578: ...0 X0 to XF immediately when the execution condition trigger R10 turns on and updates external output relays WY0 Y0 to YF immediately when the execution condition trigger R20 turns on Description Updates the external inputs X and external outputs Y specified by D1 and D2 immediately even in the program execution stage Refreshing Updating initiated by the F143 IORF instruction is done only for the c...

Page 579: ... X Expansion FP0 Adapter FP0 A N A FP0R A A FP e A FPΣ 12k A N A A FPΣ 32k A A A FP X A A N A N A A Available N A Not Available For FPΣ 32k type and FP0R partial I O update is possible with FP0 expansion units however it takes approx 1 ms for 1 unit FP0 FP0R FP e FPΣ FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 580: ... N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A Explanation of example Updates the input and output relay of word no 0 to 1 2 words 32 points immediately when the trigger R10 turns on When the configuration shown below is being used When the instruction is executed the WX0 X0 to XF input processing and the WY1 Y10 to Y1F output processing are carried out Outline Updates specified partial I O points 0 1...

Page 581: ...he unit on the master and expansion backplanes No update is performed for the input output relay of the MEWNET F remote I O system slave station How to specify D1 and D2 Set the starting address D1 and the ending address D2 D1 D2 Specify the word address with K0 D1 D2 K255 Set the same word address in both D1 and D2 to update only one word FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web w...

Page 582: ... number of bytes to be sent When the value is positive an end code is added When the value is negative an end code is not added When the value is H8000 the transmission mode of the RS232C port is changed Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT I K H modifier S N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A FP0 FP e F...

Page 583: ...ort To switch between computer link communication and serial data communication general purpose port execute an F144 TRNS instruction Set n the number of transmission bytes to H8000 and then execute the instruction When executed when general purpose port is selected the setting will change to computer link F144 TRNS DT100 H8000 R0 R9032 DF 1 1 When executed when computer link is selected the setti...

Page 584: ...ed automatically There is no restriction on the number of bytes n that can be transmitted Following the initial area of the data S transmission is possible up to the data range that can be used by the data register However if the FP0R is used as the FP0 FP0 compatibility mode the maximum number is 2048 bytes When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of data bytes not yet transmitted is...

Page 585: ...gister 413 the start code will be automatically added to the beginning of the data The end code selected is automatically added to the end of the data A B C D E F G H C R DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Sending data Number of bytes not yet transmitted DT100 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 R9039 Trigger R1 During transmission F144 TRNS instruction cannot be executed F144 TRNS execution on off on off 3 When the specified...

Page 586: ... and operation during reception Data sent from the external device connected to the RS232C port will be stored in the data register areas set as the reception buffer Word address 0 Area used for number of bytes received 1 2 n 1 2 2n 2n 1 Area used for storing received data the circled numbers indicate the storing order Reception buffer 3 4 Each time data is received the amount of data received num...

Page 587: ...er from the lower byte DT203 H46 F H45 E K8 Reception buffer when reception is completed Program When reception of data from an external device has been completed the reception completed flag R9038 goes on and further reception of data is not allowed To receive more data an F144 TRNS instruction must be executed to turn off the reception completed flag R9038 and clear the byte number to zero R0 F1...

Page 588: ...ble Reception possible Reception not possible Reopening on off on off F144 TRNS execution 2 When an end code is received the reception completed flag R9038 goes on After this no further reception of data is allowed 3 When an F144 TRNS instruction is executed the reception completed flag R9038 goes off and the number of received data bytes is cleared to zero Further data received is stored in order...

Page 589: ...the value is negative an end code is not added When the value is H8000 the transmission mode of the RS232C port is changed Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT I K H modifier S N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A A A Explanation of example When the trigger R0 turns on 8 bytes of the data stored in data regi...

Page 590: ...ersonal computer COM port Reception Reception is controlled by the reception completed flag R9038 being turned on and off When reception completed flag R9038 is off the data sent to the COM port stored in the reception buffer selected in system registers 417 and 418 When an F144 TRNS instruction is executed reception completed flag R9038 goes off FP10SH Reception External device Bar code reader CO...

Page 591: ...lid off STX H02 valid on End code None off off CR H0D and LF H0A on off CR H0D off on EXT H03 on on Stop bit 2 bits off p 1 bit on Parity check Invalid off off y Even parity on off Odd parity on on Data length character 7 bits off character bit 8 bits on For FP2 FP2SH Set the transmission format parameter so that the Transmission Format Setting of system register 413 matches the external device co...

Page 592: ...etting is 19200 bps 3 Setting the use of the COM port Set system register 412 for serial transmission general purpose port To switch between computer link communication and serial data communication general purpose port execute an F144 TRNS instruction Set n the number of transmission bytes to H8000 and then execute the instruction When executed when computer link is selected the setting will chan...

Page 593: ...on data as it will be added automatically If the start code is set to Yes do not include a start code in the transmission data as it will be added automatically When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of data bytes not yet transmitted is stored in the starting area of the data table Note Take care that the transmission data table and reception buffer areas set in system registers 417...

Page 594: ...e start code STX is set to Yes using system register 413 the start code will be automatically added to the beginning of the data The end code selected is automatically added to the end of the data A B C D E F G H C R DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Sending data Number of bytes not yet transmitted DT100 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 R9039 Trigger R1 During transmission F144 TRNS instruction cannot be executed F144 TRN...

Page 595: ...l Disabled off control Enabled on Start code STX H02 invalid off STX H02 valid on End code None off off CR H0D and LF H0A on off CR H0D off on EXT H03 on on Stop bit 2 bits off p 1 bit on Parity check Invalid off off y Even parity on off Odd parity on on Data length character 7 bits off character bit 8 bits on For FP2 FP2SH Set the transmission format parameter so that the Transmission Format Sett...

Page 596: ...tem register 414 matches the external device connected to the COM port The default setting is 19200 bps 3 Setting the use of the COM port Set system register 412 for serial transmission general purpose port The use of the COM port can be changed by executing an F144 TRNS instruction 4 Setting the reception buffer System register 417 and 418 All areas of the data register are initially set for use ...

Page 597: ...ue is zero The data received is stored in order in the reception data storage area beginning from the lower byte of the second word of the area Example Reception of the eight characters A B C D E F G and H 8 bytes of data from an external device The reception buffer is DT200 to DT204 in this example System register settings are as follows System register 417 K200 System register 418 K5 DT200 Each ...

Page 598: ...ith each one byte received the value in the leading address of the reception buffer is incremented by 1 A B T U V C R Reception operation start Received data Number of bytes received 1 2 20 0 1 2 0 R9038 Trigger R0 Reception possible Reception possible Reception not possible Reopening on off on off F144 TRNS execution 2 When an end code is received the reception completed flag R9038 goes on After ...

Page 599: ...A N A N A N A N A N N A A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 N A N A N A A A A 1 I0 to ID 2 It can be specified only for the FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V2 50 or later however an operation error will occur not a syntac error if K or H constant is specified as S1 and D Operation It is used to send commands to the serial port COM1 or COM2 of the specified unit in the MEWTOCOL COM mode connecting the unit th...

Page 600: ... S1 1 Specify the remote unit with the unit number When H00 it is global transmission No response Specify either the COM1 or COM2 port from which data is transmitted to the remote unit Specify H1 if only one COM port is available 3 Specify the area of the local unit by S2 in which the data to be transmitted is stored Specify the memory area of the local unit in which the data to be transmitted is ...

Page 601: ...s for the same communication port simultaneously The program should be set up so that these instructions are executed when the SEND RECV execution enabled flag R9044 COM1 R904A COM2 is on R9044 COM1 0 Execution inhibited SEND RECV instruction being executed 1 Execution enabled R904A COM2 0 Execution inhibited SEND RECV instruction being executed 1 Execution enabled The SEND instruction only reques...

Page 602: ... 10 seconds Error code HEX Description 73 Time out Waiting for response For global transmission the transmission performed by specifying H00 for the unit No the program should be set up so that the transmission is executed after a time of at least the maximum scan time elapsed The F145 or F146 instruction cannot be executed if the target is a special internal relay from R9000 or a special data reg...

Page 603: ...A N A A A N A N A A D N A A A N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N N A A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 N A N A N A A A A 1 I0 to ID 2 It can be specified only for the FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V2 50 or later however an operation error will occur not a syntac error if K or H constant is specified as S1 and D Operation It is used to send commands to the serial port COM1 or COM2 of the specifie...

Page 604: ...n No response Specify either the COM1 or COM2 port from which data is transmitted to the remote unit Specify H1 if only one COM port is available 3 Specify the area of the local unit by S2 in which the data to be transmitted is stored Specify the memory area of the local unit in which the data to be transmitted is stored 4 Specify the area of the remote unit for storing by D and N Specify 0 for th...

Page 605: ...a value of the bit 0 of WR3 and sets the condition by selecting ON or OFF Specify ON FF00 OFF 0000 Command 06 DT1 word write send Example When the 1 worddata of WR3 is transmitted to the DT1000 of the unit No 7 in the remote unit from the COM1 F145 SEND DT10 WR3 DT0 K1000 Specifies No of transmission words H1 to H7F S1 Word unit transmission H0 H0 H0 H1 DT10 Word units H0 for the transmission meth...

Page 606: ...ination for the starting No of status change Remote unit The quantity of changed coils is that the No of write bits is changed to HEX Max quantity of changed coils is 2032 07F0H due to the restrictions on the MODBUS protocol No of data No of bytes is calculated regarded 8 coils as 1 data 1 byte Max 254 FEH bytes MODBUS commands Slave address Command 0FH Starting No of status change H Starting No o...

Page 607: ... H Write data 3 L CRC16 H CRC16 L 07 10 01 F4 00 03 06 00 11 22 33 44 55 5A E7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The control data of S1 and S1 1 is a value outside of the specified range The number of words specified by S1 causes the area of S2 or D to be exceeded when word unit transmis...

Page 608: ...904B is on the contents of the error error code are stored For information on the contents of error codes refer to the manual If the error code is H73 a communication time out error has occurred The time out time can be changed within a range of 10 0 ms to 81 9 seconds in units of 2 5 ms using the setting of system register 32 The default value is set to 10 seconds Error code HEX Description 73 Ti...

Page 609: ...ifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD In 1 SWR SDT K H modifier S1 A A A A A A A A N A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A N A A A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A N A N N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A A 1 I0 to ID 2 This instruction is available only for FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V2 50 or later Description The send data specified by S2 is sent to the MODBUS address specified by D with ...

Page 610: ... specified by S1 and the device type in the remote unit differs That means the contents of DT can be transmitted by specifying the bit data or the contents of WR can be transmitted by specifying the word data When the bit data is specified by S1 data is always transmitted from the bit 0 Specifying the MODBUS address of the remote unit where data is transmitted by D Settable address H0 to HFFFF Spe...

Page 611: ...WR3 WR3 3210H WR4 7654H WR5 BA98H WR6 FEDCH D H7788 N K64 When specifying multiple points by N the command is automatically corrected H5 bit single write H15 bit multiple write The starting No fo status change is H7788 Remote unit The quantity of changed coils is that the No of write bits is changed to HEX Max quantity of changed coils is 2040 07F8H due to the restrictions on the MODBUS protocol N...

Page 612: ...ite L No of write registers H No of write registers L No of data No of bytes Write data 1 H Write data 1 L Write data 2 H Write data 2 L Write data 3 H Write data 3 L CRC16 H CRC16 L 07 10 77 88 00 03 06 00 11 22 33 44 55 2C BA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on when the control data of S1 is a value outside of the specified range Tur...

Page 613: ...24 COM1 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9045 is on the contents of the error error code are stored R904B COM2 0 Completed normally 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT90125 DT90125 COM2 If the transmission has been completed with an error R904B is on the contents of the error error code are stored If the error code is H73 a communication time out error has oc...

Page 614: ... D above destination data area in another station Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A Explanation of example 1 Example of wor...

Page 615: ...work Description This sends the local station data for the area specified by S2 to the areas specified by the D and N of the remote stations connected with the MEWNET W MEWNET P and MEWNET H The remote stations routes and unit numbers the transmission unit bit unit or word unit the transmission method and other parameters are specified by the control data S1 Link unit CPU Local station Remote stat...

Page 616: ...nd N Specify the memory area of the remote station in which the data to be transmitted is stored specifying the type D and the address N in combination Example D DT0 N K100 DT100 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The control data is a value outside of the specified range The remote station does not exist The number of words sp...

Page 617: ...nsmission is being used the information of the specified bit in the memory area of the local station specified by S2 is sent to the specified bit of the memory area of the remote station specified by D and N 11 15 Bit No of local station H0 to HF 0 to 15 Specifies H8 S1 7 4 0 Specifies H0 Bit No of remote station H0 to HF 0 to 15 Example If the data of Bit No 15 of the local station memory area is...

Page 618: ...ple Communicating with a CPU at depth 1 Local station Power CPU Link Link Relay station Remote station Unit of relay source Unit of relay destination Unit of remote station Depth 0 Power CPU Link Depth 1 Power CPU Link In this way by passing data through a relay station communication is possible to a depth of 3 Note When using the MEWNET P and MEWNET W data can only be relayed one network deeper i...

Page 619: ...remote station is specified with S1 1 and subsequent parameters the relay source unit relay destination unit and unit targeted for communication depth 3 words are required Example Control data when specifying a remote station which is at depth 3 S1 S1 1 S1 2 Local station Depth H03 Relay source Relay destination Relay source Relay destination Remote station H00 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU5 S1 3 S1 5 Specif...

Page 620: ...in S1 2 Specifying bit unit transmission If bit unit transmission is being used the information of the specified bit in the memory area of the local station specified by S2 is sent to the specified bit of the memory area of the remote station specified by D and N 15 Bit No of local station s memory area H0 to HF 0 to 15 Specifies H8 S1 11 7 4 0 Specifies H0 Bit No of remote station s memory area H...

Page 621: ...r the specification of the relay station Specifies H00 S1 n Unit No of remote station H01 to H40 1 to 64 n depth 2 Example When using the program example shown on page 3 339 In this example the 5 words of data from DT20 to DT24 of the local station CPU1 are sent to DT100 and subsequent addresses of the CPU CPU5 shown below No 2 No 4 No 16 No 10 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 DT100 to DT104 DT20 to DT24 No ...

Page 622: ...mpleted R9031 0 Completed normally 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT9039 DT9039 DT90039 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9031 is on the contents of the error error code are stored For information on the contents of error codes refer to the manual for that particular link unit If the error code is H71 to H73 a communication time out error has occurred The ti...

Page 623: ...2SH FP10SH X10 F145 SEND S DT9 DT0 Kn 10 Sending special internal relays source issuing the command FP2 FP2SH FP10SH X10 F145 SEND S WR9 DT0 Kn 10 How to send FL How to specify FL banks How to specify the FL bank for destination units The FL to communicate is specified like FL0 H10 Specify FL1 H10 to specify the FL of the bank 1 FL2 H10 for the bank 2 How to specify the FL bank for a local unit No...

Page 624: ...A N A N A N A N A N N A A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 N A N A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A A 1 I0 to ID 2 It can be specified only for the FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V2 50 or later however an operation error will occur not a syntac error if K or H constant is specified as S1 and S2 Operation It is used to send commands to the serial port COM1 or COM2 of the specified unit in t...

Page 625: ...mber Specify either the COM1 or COM2 port from which data is transmitted to the remote unit Specify H1 if only one COM port is available 3 Specifying the area of the remote unit which is received by S2 and N Specify 0 for the device No of S2 Specify the memory area of the remote unit in which the data to be transmitted is stored specifying the type S2 and the address N in combination S2 DT0 N K100...

Page 626: ...uctions for the same communication port simultaneously The program should be set up so that these instructions are executed when the SEND RECV execution enabled flag R9044 COM1 R904A COM2 is on R9044 COM1 0 Execution inhibited SEND RECV instruction being executed 1 Execution enabled R904A COM2 0 Execution inhibited SEND RECV instruction being executed 1 Execution enabled The SEND instruction only ...

Page 627: ... to 81 9 seconds in units of 2 5 ms using the setting of system register 32 The default value is set to 10 seconds Error code HEX Description 73 Time out Waiting for response The F145 or F146 instruction cannot be executed if the target is a special internal relay from R9000 or a special data register from DT9000 or file register FL FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr ...

Page 628: ...N A N A N A N A N A N N A A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 N A N A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A A 1 I0 to ID 2 It can be specified only for the FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V2 50 or later however an operation error will occur not a syntac error if K or H constant is specified as S1 and S2 Operation It is used to send commands to the serial port COM1 or COM2 of the specified unit in...

Page 629: ... or COM2 port from which data is transmitted to the remote unit Specify H1 if only one COM port is available 3 Specifying the area of the remote unit which is received by S2 and N Specify 0 for the device No of S2 Specify the memory area of the remote unit in which the data to be transmitted is stored specifying the type S2 and the address N in combination S2 DT0 N K100 DT100 Example 4 Specifying ...

Page 630: ...he quantity to read should be 1 S1 DT10 DT10 8507H DT11 1011H S2 WY0 N K1 D DT100 Example When the 64 bits 4 words of data from Y10 to Y4F is readedfrom the unit No 17 of the remoteunit and a command data to the area starting with DT100 in the local unit is sent from the COM1 F146 RECV DT10 WY0 K1 DT100 Specifies No of transmission words H001 to H07F S1 Word unit transmission H0 H0 H0 H4 DT10 Bit ...

Page 631: ...o read L CRC16 H CRC16 L 11 02 00 17 00 01 0B 5E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Example When the 64 bits 4 words of data from X10 to X4F is readedfrom theunit No 17 of the remoteunit and a command data to the area starting with DT100 in the local unit is sent from the COM1 F146 RECV DT10 WX0 K1 DT100 S1 H0 H0 H0 H4 DT10 Specifies No of transmission words H001 to H07F Word unit transmission Bit units H0 should be...

Page 632: ...ntity to read L CRC16 H CRC16 L 11 03 01 F4 00 06 87 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Command 04 WL LD read send Example When the 6 words of data from WL20 to WL25 is readed from the unit No 17 of the remote unit and a command data to the area starting with DT100 in the local unit is sent from the COM1 F146 RECV DT10 WL0 K20 DT100 S1 H0 H0 H0 H6 DT10 Specifies No of transmission words H001 to H07F Word unit tra...

Page 633: ...RC16 L 11 04 08 34 00 06 31 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The control data of S1 and S1 1 is a value outside of the specified range The number of words specified by S1 causes the area of S2 or D to be exceeded when word unit transmission is being used S2 N exceeds the area of S2 The MODBUS mode has n...

Page 634: ...The error code is stored in DT90125 DT90125 COM2 If the transmission has been completed with an error R904B is on the contents of the error error code are stored For information on the contents of error codes refer to the manual If the error code is H73 a communication time out error has occurred The time out time can be changed within a range of 10 0 ms to 81 9 seconds in units of 2 5 ms using th...

Page 635: ...A A A N A A A A A A S2 A A A A N A N A A A N A N A N A A A N A N N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A A 1 I0 to ID 2 This instruction is available only for FP0R FPΣ V3 20 or later FP X V 250 or later Description The data of the volume specified by N is received form the MODBUS address specified by S2 with the specification of the transmission port transmissio...

Page 636: ... the operation memory of the destination unit in which the data to be received is stored This instruction can be executed even if the transmission command specified by S1 and the device type in the destination unit differs That means the contents of DT can be transmitted by specifying the bit data or the contents of WR can be transmitted by specifying the word data When the command 1 or 2 is speci...

Page 637: ...F146 RECV H1211 H7788 K1 DT100 S1 H1 H1 H1 Unit No H01 to HFF Selects COM port H1 Command conversion S1 H1211 S2 H7788 N K1 D DT100 MODBUS commands Slave address Command 02H Starting No of read H Starting No of read L Quantity to read H Quantity to read L CRC16 H CRC16 L 11 02 77 88 00 01 20 C4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Example When 64 bits 4 words are read from the bit address H7788 of the unit No 17 conne...

Page 638: ...0 in the local unit F146 RECV H1411 H7788 K6 DT100 Command conversion S1 H1411 S2 H7788 N K6 D DT100 MODBUS commands Slave address Command 04H Starting No of read H Starting No of read L Quantity to read H Quantity to read L CRC16 H CRC16 L 11 04 77 88 00 06 E9 06 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on when the control data of S1 is a value outside of the sp...

Page 639: ...COM1 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9045 is on the contents of the error error code are stored R904B COM2 0 Completed normally 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT90125 DT90125 COM2 If the transmission has been completed with an error R904B is on the contents of the error error code are stored If the error code is H73 a communication time out error has occur...

Page 640: ... received destination data area at local station Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A Explanation of example 1 Example of word...

Page 641: ... station connection with the MEWNET W MEWNET P MEWNET H and stores it in the area specified by D of the local station The remote stations routes and unit numbers the transmission unit bit unit or word unit the transmission method and other parameters are specified by the control data S1 D S2 N Receiving request Data Link unit CPU Local station Remote station The remote station is specified by S1 I...

Page 642: ...ation Example S2 DT10 N K100 DT100 Specifying the memory area of the local station D Specify the memory area of the local station in whichthe data received from the remote station is to be stored Flag conditions Σ Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Σ Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The control data is a value outside of the specified range Tthe remote station does not exist ...

Page 643: ...it units the information for the specified bit of the memory area of the remote station specified by S2 and N is stored in the specified bit of the memory area of the local station specified by D 11 15 Bit No of remote station H0 to HF 0 to 15 Specifies H8 S1 7 4 0 Specifies H0 Bit No of local station H0 to HF 0 to 15 Example If the data from Bit No 0 of the memory area in the remote station is be...

Page 644: ...mple Communicating with a CPU at depth 1 Local station Power CPU Link Link Relay station Remote station Unit of relay source Unit of relay destination Unit of remote station Depth 0 Power CPU Link Depth 1 Power CPU Link In this way by passing data through a relay station communication is possible to a depth of 3 Note When using the MEWNET P and MEWNET W data can only be relayed one network deeper ...

Page 645: ...mote station is specified with S1 1 and subsequent parameters the relay source unit relay destination unit and unit targeted for communication depth 3 words are required Example Control data when specifying a remote station which is at depth 3 S1 S1 1 S1 2 Local station Depth H03 Relay source Relay destination Relay source Relay destination Remote station H00 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU5 S1 3 S1 5 Specifyi...

Page 646: ...ecifying bit unit reception When data is being sent in bit units the information for the specified bit of the memory area of the remote station specified by S2 and N is stored in the specified bit of the memory area of the local station specified by D 15 Bit No of remote station s memory area H0 to HF 0 to 15 Specifies H8 S1 11 7 4 0 Specifies H0 Bit No of local station s memory area H0 to HF 0 to...

Page 647: ...fied right after the specification of the relay station Specifies H00 S1 n Unit No of remote station H01 to H40 1 to 64 n depth 2 Example When using the program example shown on page 3 376 In this example the data from DT100 to DT104 of the CPU CPU5 is received in DT50 to DT54 of the local station CPU1 shown below No 2 No 4 No 16 No 10 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 DT100 to DT104 DT50 to DT54 Power CPU 1 ...

Page 648: ...eceive completed flag R9031 can be used to check whether or not the reception has been completed R9031 0 Completed normally 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT9039 DT9039 DT90039 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9031 is on the contents of the error error code are stored For information on the contents of error codes refer to the manual for that particular lin...

Page 649: ...P2SH FP10SH X10 F146 RECV S DT90000 Kn DT0 10 Receiving special internal relays source issuing the command FP2 FP2SH FP10SH X10 F146 RECV S WR900 Kn DT0 10 How to receive FL How to specify FL banks How to specify the FL bank for destination units The FL to communicate is specified like FL0 H10 Specify FL1 H10 to specify the FL of the bank 1 FL2 H10 for the bank 2 How to specify the FL bank for a l...

Page 650: ...ds of ASCII codes source D Word external output relay used for output of ASCII codes destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL 1 SV EV DT LD 1 FL 2 I K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A D N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0 and FP e 2 This cannot be used with the FP...

Page 651: ... area specified by S through the word external output relay WY specified by D S WY S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 15 0 D1 to D8 STROBE If the specified output is connected to a commercial printer the characters corresponding to the output ASCII code are printed Only bit positions 0 to 8 of WY are used in the actual printout WY0 Y9 to YF not used YFYE YD YC YB YA Y9 Y8 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 Y0 to YF for dat...

Page 652: ...7 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The ending area for storing ASCII codes exceeds the limit The trigger of another F147 PR instruction turns on while one F147 PR instruction is being executed Printout flag R9033 Turns on and stays on while a F147 PR instruction is being executed Connection example Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 COM DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5...

Page 653: ... output When only eight output points are being used connections should be made as shown below and the program should be set up so that the strobe signal is output from Y7 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 COM DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 STROBE GND Printer centronics interface Connection example Transistor output type output 8 point X10 F147 PR DT0 WY0 R9033 Y8 Y7 Strobe signal is output...

Page 654: ...dex modifier Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H modifier n N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A N A Explanation of example The self diagnosis error 100 is set when the execution condition trigger R0 turns on For FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X the ERROR ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit blinks and for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH ERROR LED on CPU lights and operation stops If a situationoccurs i...

Page 655: ... 0 and the F148 ERR instruction is executed self diagnostic errors with error codes of 43 and higher are cleared For FP0 FP e FP0R FPΣ FP X ERROR ALARM LED turned off For FP2 FP2SH FP10SH ERROR LED turned off R9000 R9005 R9006 R9007 R9008 off DT9000 DT9017 DT9018 Cleared to 0 DT90000 DT90017 DT90018 Cleared to 0 F148 ERR instructions which specify the same error code can be notated in duplicate in...

Page 656: ...n Description This instruction is used for displaying message specified by S on the programming tool The character constants M can be input only with programming tool software When the F149 MSG instruction is executed the message flag R9026 turns on and the message specified by S is set in special data registers DT9030 to DT9035 DT90030 to DT90035 Type Special data register FP0 C10 C14 C16 C32 FP ...

Page 657: ...ith 7 9 and 12 module type boards slot numbers are specified in the same way as with the 14 module type Number being specified Hexadecimal constants 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C0D 0E0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E1F 16 slots slots which can be counted as slot numbers 14 slots number of slots on backplane CPU side 14 module type backplane 16 slots slots which can be counte...

Page 658: ...ified in the same way as with 8 slot boards Number being specified Hexadecimal constants 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F Board number 1 Board number 2 Board number 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Expansion Expansion Expansion Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply CP...

Page 659: ...source data address n 16 bit equivalent constant for specifying the number of words to be read D Starting 16 bit area address for storing read data destination data address Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H Index modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A S2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A...

Page 660: ...ifying the slot number and bank number S1 Specify the slot in which the intelligent unit has been installed If the memory has a bank enter a specification that matches the bank number Initial readout address of the shared memory for the intelligent unit S2 Specify this referring to the shared memory tables for the various intelligent units To specify address 2 specify K2 Number of words to be read...

Page 661: ...unit with bank Specify the slot number H constant in which the target intelligent unit has been installed and the bank number H constant Upper byte Lower byte Slot No H00 to H1F Bank No H00 to HFF S1 Reference Intelligent unit with bank Name Order No FP3 expansion data memory unit AFP32091 AFP32092 FPΣ expansion data memory unit AFPG201 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email ...

Page 662: ...ent constant for specifying the number of words written in the shared memory D Starting 16 bit area address for storing data written destination data address Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I K H Index modifier S1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A n N A N A N A N A N A N ...

Page 663: ...umber S1 Specify the slot in which the intelligent unit has been installed If the memory has a bank enter a specification that matches the bank number Number of words to be written n Specify this using a K constant To write 10 words of data specify K10 Initial address written to the shared memory of the intelligent unit D Specify this referring to the table of shared memories for the various intel...

Page 664: ...unit with bank Specify the slot number H constant in which the target intelligent unit has been installed and the bank number H constant Upper byte Lower byte Slot No H00 to H1F Bank No H00 to HFF S1 Reference Intelligent unit with bank Name Order No FP3 expansion data memory unit AFP32091 AFP32092 FPΣ expansion data memory unit AFPG201 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email ...

Page 665: ...ligent unit n 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area for specifying number of read data words D Starting 16 bit area for storing the read data Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A n A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A ...

Page 666: ... D Specifying the various items Control data S1 Specify the master station number slave station number and slot number and the bank number if there is a bank and specify the memory of the intelligent unit for detailed information refer to the following page Initial readout address of the shared memory for the intelligent unit S2 Enter the specification referring to the shared memory tables for the...

Page 667: ...H20 1 to 32 Master station No H01 to H04 1 to 4 Bank No H00 to HFF Slot No H00 to H1F S1 S1 1 Reference Intelligent unit with bank Name Order No FP3 expansion data memory unit AFP32091 AFP32092 Example of setting When specifying the intelligent unit installed in slot number 0 of the No 5 slave station on the path of the No 1 master station using the program example on page 3 401 the program will b...

Page 668: ...rmally 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT9036 DT90036 DT9036 DT90036 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9036 is on the contents of the error error code are stored Reference The error codes stored in the DT9036 DT90036 Error code HEX Description H5B Time out error no intelligent unit found at the specified location H68 No memory error no memory exists at the sp...

Page 669: ...ea for specifying number of data words written D 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area for storing the starting address of the shared memory in the intelligent unit Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A n A A A A A A A A...

Page 670: ...and S1 1 Specifying the various items Control data S1 Specify the master station number slave station number and slot number and the bank number if there is a bank and specify the memory of the intelligent unit for detailed information refer to the following page Specifying the address of the shared memory S2 Enter the specification referring to the shared memory tables for the various intelligent...

Page 671: ... 1 to 32 Master station No H01 to H04 1 to 4 Bank No H00 to HFF Slot No H00 to H1F S1 S1 1 Reference Intelligent unit with bank Name Order No FP3 expansion data memory unit AFP32091 AFP32092 Example of setting When specifying the intelligent unit installed in slot number 2 of the No 10 slave station on the path of the No 2 master station using the program example on page 3 405 the program will be ...

Page 672: ...ly 1 Completed with error The error code is stored in DT9036 DT90036 DT9036 DT90036 If the transmission has been completed with an error R9036 is on the contents of the error error code are stored Reference The error codes stored in the DT9036 DT90036 Error code HEX Description H5B Time out error no intelligent unit found at the specified location H68 No memory error no memory exists at the specif...

Page 673: ...he cable and the time interval and specification of the sampling trace can be done using only the programming tool software Description During a sampling trace sampling of the specified data relay contacts and registers is carried out and the data contents at the time of sampling are stored in the sampling trace memory If the sampling trace settings and the startup have not been specified using th...

Page 674: ...mes or the time interval 2 Indicate that the sampling trace is to begin 3 Sampling is carried out Sampling can be carried out using with periodic sampling or sampling based on the F155 SMPL instruction 4 Stops a sampling trace Programming tool software online operation or executing the F156 STRG instruction applies a stop command trigger When a trigger is applied sampling of the specified delay is...

Page 675: ...ble and the time interval and specification of the sampling trace can be done using only the programming tool software Description This instruction applies a sampling trace stop command trigger When a trigger is applied sampling of the specified delay is carried out and then sampling trace stops If the sampling trace settings and the startup have not been specified using the programming tool softw...

Page 676: ...mes or the time interval 2 Indicate that the sampling trace is to begin 3 Sampling is carried out Sampling can be carried out using with periodic sampling or sampling based on the F155 SMPL instruction 4 Stops a sampling trace Programming tool software online operation or executing the F156 STRG instruction applies a stop command trigger When a trigger is applied sampling of the specified delay is...

Page 677: ...e clock data 3 words are occupied in form of BCD S2 Starting 16 bit area for storing time data 2 words are occupied in form of BCD D Starting 16 bit area for storing result 3 words are occupied in form of BCD Operands Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL IX IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A A...

Page 678: ...T30 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds June 18 1992 7 15 24 H920618071524 BCD Addition Description The date clock data 3 words specifiedby S1 and the time data 2 words specifiedby S2 are addedtogether The result time of elapsed value is stored in the area 3 words specified by D BCD H code S1 2 S1 1 S1 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Date clock data BCD H code S2 1 S2 Hours Minutes Sec...

Page 679: ...on for the internal calendar timer DT90056 DT90055 DT90054 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Precautions during programming The special data registers DT9054 to DT9056 DT90054 to DT90056 in which the values of the internal calendar timer are stored cannot be specified directly for D To change the value of the internal calendar timer store the addition results i...

Page 680: ...ock data 3 words are used in form of BCD S2 Starting 16 bit area for storing time data 2 words are used in form of BCD D Starting 16 bit area for storing result 3 words are used in form of BCD Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 IX 2 IY K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A A...

Page 681: ...617065954 BCD Subtraction 9 2 0 6 1 7 0 6 DT32 DT31 5 9 5 4 DT30 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Description Subtracts time data 2 words specified by S2 from the date clock data 3 words specifiedby S1 The result is stored in the area 3 words specified by D BCD H code S1 2 S1 1 S1 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Date clock data BCD H code S2 1 S2 Hours Minutes Seconds Time data BCD ...

Page 682: ...cautions during programming The special data registers DT9054 to DT9056 DT90054 to DT90056 in which the values of the internal calendar timer are stored cannot be specified directly for D To change the value of the internal calendar timer storethesubtractionresultsinaseparatememoryarea andthenusetheF0 MV instructiontotransfer the value to DT9054 to DT9056 DT90054 to DT90056 Data configuration for ...

Page 683: ...rs Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Starting time December 23 1994 8 2 15 BCD H code 9 4 1 2 2 3 1 0 S2 2 S2 1 3 0 2 5 S2 Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Ending time December 23 1994 10 30 25 The data to be subtracted is taken from the starting time data as shown below BCD H code 0 0 0 8 0 2 1 5 Hours Minutes Seconds 8 02 15 BCD H code 9 4 1 2 2 3 0 2 DT32 DT31 2 8 1 0 DT30 Years Months D...

Page 684: ...hen the value is negative an end code is not added When the value is H8000 the transmission mode of the RS232C port is changed D Port for transmitting data K0 K1 K2 K0 TOOL port FPΣ 32k FP X K1 COM1 Port FP0R COM Port K2 COM2 Port Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD IX 1 IY K H Index modifier S N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N ...

Page 685: ...done flag R9038 R9048 The maximum number of bytes that can be received is 4094 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area is exceeded when there is an index modifier The data table exceeds the area because of the number of bytes specified in n 3 Changing the transmission mode of the RS232C port An F159 MTRN instruction can be ...

Page 686: ...end of transmission 0 is set S 1 S 2 S n 1 2 3 4 2n 2n 1 Transmission data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission Example Transmitting the eight characters A B C D E F G H 8 bytes of data This example uses DT100 to DT104 as the data table DT100 When transmission begins Nothing is set When transmission ends Cleared to 0 DT101 DT102 DT104 H42 B H41 A H44 D H43 C H48 H H4...

Page 687: ...art code is automatically added to the beginning of the data The end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data A B C D E F G H C R DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Transmission data R9039 R9049 Execution condition trigger R0 During transmission F159 MTRN execution on off on off During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed 3 When all of t...

Page 688: ...P0R The area of data registers DT2048 up to DT4095 is the default reception buffer The maximum number of bytes that can be received is 4094 bytes No of received bytes Reception data storage area Specified number of words for No 419 Specify start area as No 418 Setting of Tool port reception buffer No 420 and No 421 The area of data registers DT4096 up to DT6143 is the default reception buffer The ...

Page 689: ...received is stored in this area 1 2 n 1 2 2n 2n 1 Reception buffer storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of storage Reception buffer 3 4 Using a reception buffer data register Example Receiving eight bytes of data A B C D E F G H from an external device through the COM1 port DT200 to DT204 are used as the reception buffer System register settings are as follows System register 416 K2...

Page 690: ...ation Operation When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device R9038 R9048 are off during the first scan after RUN 0 is set in the starting area of the reception buffer specified in the system registers 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the reception buffer Start and end c...

Page 691: ...eception done R9038 R9048 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN instruction R9038 R9048 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data The reception done flag R9038 R9048 also changes during scanning FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 692: ...it is negative value the terminal code is not added in trasmission In case of H8000 the application of the MCU port specified in transmission is changed D Specification of the slot number and port number of the MCU unit which the data is transmitted Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I 1 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A ...

Page 693: ...e CPU 2 When specifying D with the K constant ex if the slot number is set to 3 and the COM2 2 is selected for the communication port of the MCU set as follows H03C2 to K962 convert the content specified in hexadecimal to decimal 4 The starting code and the terminal code can be added automatically in transmission 5 The transmitted byte number is maximum of 2048 bytes including starting code and te...

Page 694: ...mmediate effective time Kn 0 01 ms 0 to 100 ms 11 Modem initialization K0 Not initialized when the power turns on K1 Initialized when the power turns on Note The execution for switching the operation mode of the communication between the computer link and the general purpose serial communication mode or the setting for the communication parameter should be carried out when no communication is perf...

Page 695: ...turns on when the transmitted byte number specified by n is outside of the specified area It turns on when the transmitted byte number specified by n exceeds the area of the data table It turns on when H8000 is designated in the PC link mode It turns on when an additional parameter is registered in executing the parameter registration It turns on when H8000 is designated in the parameter registrat...

Page 696: ...A A A A A A A A D1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A 1 I0 to ID Explanation of example When the reception done signal X0 of the COM 1 port is on the received data is readout and stored in DT0 to DT100 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 R9008 It turns on when the specified addressusing the index modifier exceeds a limit It turns on when the MCU unit does not exist in ...

Page 697: ... error is detected At that time the data which has been received up to the area of D2 is stored D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 D1 4 Data table received buffer D2 3 D2 2 D2 1 D2 Received data storage area The received byte number is stored Reading of communication parameter and condition 5 When the communication port numbers specified by S is HD1 or HD2 HE1 or HE2 the registered communication parameter and the ...

Page 698: ... value K0 disable K1 able 9 Terminator setting value K0 cR K1 cR Lf K2 time 24 bits K3 EXT 10 Reception done judgment time K 0 immediate effective time Kn 0 01 ms 0 to 100 ms 11 Modem initialization K0 Not initialized K1 Initialized Configuration of monitor data 1 Operation mode K0 to K7 K0 computer link K1 general purpose serial K2 PC link K7 modem initialization 2 Communication cassette detectio...

Page 699: ...N A N A A 1 This cannot be used with the FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 With the FP0R FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH this is I0 to IC Explanation of example The square root of 32 bitdata stored in DT11 and DT10 is calculated and stored in DT21 and DT20 when R0 turns on When K64 is stored in DT11 and DT10 the following occurs F160 P160 PDSQR DSQR 32 bit data square root A Available N A Not Available Bit positi...

Page 700: ...esult the digits beyond the decimal point are disregarded S 1 S D 1 D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The data specified by S is a negative value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 701: ...Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A A 1 I0 to IC on FPΣ FP X FP0R 2 ID on FPΣ FP X FP0R Description Performs high speed counter control according to the control code specified in S This instruction is used to perform the following operations when using a high speed counter Function 1 Performing a software reset 2 Disabling the count 3 Temporarily disables r...

Page 702: ...ls flag area of FP0 DT9052 DT90052 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 ch3 ch2 ch1 ch0 Control code Written using an F0 MV instruction H0 to HF Select control codes in units of one bit and specify with H H Clears high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Note At the reset input setting you set whether the reset input X2 or X5 which was assigned by the sys...

Page 703: ...T90052 Refer to the table below The written data is the data for lower 8 bits only High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FPΣ 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Reset input setting See note 0 Enable 1 Disable Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes DT90052 Channel specification H0 to H3 CH0 to CH3 Note At the reset input settin...

Page 704: ...tored in the control code monitor area while it is written in the special register DT90052 Refer to the table below The written data is the data for lower 8 bits only High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FP X 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes DT90052 Channel specification H0 to HB CH0 ...

Page 705: ...ter and Pulse output controls flag area The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below The control code written by the F0 MV instruction is stored in the control code monitor area while it is written in the special register DT90052 Refer to the table below The written data is the data for lower 8 bits only High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area ...

Page 706: ...0360 DT90370 DT90370 ch1 DT90191 DT90361 DT90371 DT90371 ch2 DT90192 DT90362 DT90372 DT90372 ch3 DT90193 DT90363 DT90373 DT90373 ch4 DT90364 DT90374 DT90374 ch5 DT90365 DT90375 DT90375 ch6 DT90366 DT90376 ch7 DT90367 DT90377 ch8 DT90368 ch9 DT90369 chA DT90370 chB DT90371 FP0 FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 707: ...output control according to the control code specified in S This instruction is used to perform the following operations when using a Pulse output Function 1 Performing a software reset 2 Disabling the count 3 Preemptively stopping positioning pulse output 4 Clearing control executed with pulse output related instructions F171 or F176 5 Setting near home input when returning to home position and c...

Page 708: ...struction is stored in special data register DT9052 DT90052 on the FP0 T32 High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FP0 DT9052 DT90052 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 ch1 ch0 Control code Written using an F0 MV instruction H0 to HF Select control codes in units of one bit and specify with H H Stop pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Near home input 0 Enable 1 Disable Softw...

Page 709: ...allocated as shown below The control code written by the F0 MV instruction is stored in the control code monitor area while it is written in the special register DT90052 Refer to the table below The written data is the data for lower 8 bits only High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FPΣ 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Near home input 0 Enable 1 Disable Stop pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Co...

Page 710: ...R0 DF F0 MV H2001 DT90052 F0 MV H2000 DT90052 ch2 Example 2 Enable near home input during pulse output control and change to deceleration X3 DF F0 MV H10 DT90052 F0 MV H0 DT90052 ch0 X3 DF F0 MV H2010 DT90052 F0 MV H2000 DT90052 ch2 FP0 FP e FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 711: ...n data is the data for lower 8 bits only High speed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FP X 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Near home input 0 Enable 1 Disable Stop pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes DT90052 Channel specification H0 to H3 CH0 to CH3 H1 fixation PLS Program example Example 1 Software reset of Pulse output R0 DF F0 MV H101 DT90052 F0 MV ...

Page 712: ...ed counter and Pulse output controls flag area of FP0R 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Near home input 0 Enable 1 Disable Stop pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes DT90052 Channel specification H0 to H3 CH0 to CH3 H1 fixation PLS Clear of pulse output control 0 Continue 1 Stop The pulse output control is available when controlling the pulse output ch with F166 HC1S...

Page 713: ...DF F1 DMV K 3000 DT 9044 ST R 10 DF F1 DMV DT 9044 DT 6 S Writing Area for storing the elapsed value 32 bits write in the high speed counter pulse output or constant data D Reading Area for reading the elapsed value of the high speed counter pulse output Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier S A A A A A A ...

Page 714: ...ifying the memory area in S or D when reading specify only the lower order 16 bits of the memory area number Explanation of example When the execution condition R0 is on K3000 is written to the elapsed value area of ch0 of the high speed counter and pulse output Reading the elapsed value The contents of the special data register that stores the elapsed value of the high speed counter and pulse out...

Page 715: ...F1 DMV DT4 DT9044 Decrement input 0 Setting set value R0 Value in DT4 Time X0 Example 2 On R1 input the elapsed value of the ch0 is stored in data register DT100 R1 DF F1 DMV DT9044 DT100 Example 3 When the elapsed value of the ch0 is greater than K10000 the internal relay R0 turns on R9010 R900A R0 F1 DT9044 DT0 F61 DCMP DT0 K10000 FP0 FP e FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web ww...

Page 716: ...r channel no Pulse output channel no Elapsed value area ch0 ch0 DT90044 to DT90045 ch1 DT90048 to DT90049 ch2 ch2 DT90200 to DT90201 ch3 DT90204 to DT90205 For FP X Ry type High speed counter channel no Pulse output channel no Elapsed value area ch0 DT90300 to DT90301 ch1 DT90304 to DT90305 ch2 DT90308 to DT90309 ch3 DT90312 to DT90313 ch4 DT90316 to DT90317 ch5 DT90320 to DT90321 ch6 DT90324 to D...

Page 717: ... ch0 DT90348 to DT90349 ch1 DT90352 to DT90353 ch2 DT90356 to DT90357 ch3 DT90360 to DT90361 For FP0R High speed counter channel no Pulse output channel no Elapsed value area ch0 DT90300 to DT90301 ch1 DT90304 to DT90305 ch2 DT90308 to DT90309 ch3 DT90312 to DT90313 ch4 DT90316 to DT90317 ch5 DT90320 to DT90323 ch0 DT90400 to DT90401 ch1 DT90410 to DT90411 ch2 DT90420 to DT90421 ch3 DT90430 to DT9...

Page 718: ...ending order 2 Judge the position of the current value of high speed counter set 1 to the correponding bit in the targe position notification area of the internal relay and clear the others to 0 3 After that in case of addition the target position notification internal relay changes every time the elapsed value matches the targe values However in case of subtraction Target value 1 is used as the t...

Page 719: ...ble pointer moves to the beginning Only the elapsed value is cleared to 0 V1 05 or older Only the elapsed value is cleared to 0 Only the elapsed value is cleared to 0 When the maximum value control has been specified set the maximum target value to a large value which cannot be reached for returning the value to the starting address of data tabe using the hardware reset signal Sample operation Whe...

Page 720: ...ction can be simultaneously executed for 2 channels only When the maximum value control and the hardware software reset is used at the same time do not operate them intensively in a short time When hardware software reset is used set the first target value to an integer value that is 1 or more Channels of high speed cunter and areas used High speed counter channel No Control flag Elapsed value are...

Page 721: ...e Turns on when it matches the 17th target value Turns on when it matches the 15th target value Turns on when this instruction is executed Only when the current value is smaller than target posit When the number of the target values is in the range of 1 to 16 1 word is used When the number of the target values is in the range of 17 to 32 2 words are used Values in specified in S 2 and S 3 4 Specif...

Page 722: ... 4000 DT108 F1 DMV K 8000 DT110 F1 DMV K 10000 DT112 F1 DMV K 14000 DT114 F1 DMV K 0 DT90300 R9013 Start of cam control Specification of high speed counter channel 0 Specification of internal relay word No 4 point output Target value 1 Max target value Reset of elapsed value Target value 2 Target value 3 Target value 4 Explanation of program operation When adding elapsed values with the maximum ta...

Page 723: ... below Cam output Target value 1 R11 10000 2 R12 4000 3 R13 4000 4 R14 8000 Program DF F165 CAM0 DT100 R3 F1 DMV H 0 DT100 F1 DMV H 1 DT102 F1 DMV H 4 DT104 F1 DMV K 10000 DT106 F1 DMV K 4000 DT108 F1 DMV K 4000 DT110 F1 DMV K 8000 DT112 F1 DMV K 0 DT114 F1 DMV K 0 DT90300 R9013 ICTL H 0 H 1 R9013 Specification of high speed counter channel 0 Specification of internal relay word No INT0 interrupt ...

Page 724: ...8 Turns on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Turns on when the specified channel is out of the setting range Turns on when any other setting than the high speed counter pulse output is specified Turns on when the word number of the internal relay where the target value is output is out of the setting range Turns on when the specification of the number of target val...

Page 725: ...t contains the data D The output coil that is turned on when the values match Yn Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier n N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A N A S A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to IC on FPΣ FP X FP0R 2 ID on FPΣ FP X FP0R Explanation of example T...

Page 726: ...d is specified only the WY memory is set reset Precautions during programming Set the high speed counter by the system register before using this instruction The high speed counter control flag turns on when the execution condition of the F166 HC1S instruction turns on and remains on until the target value match output turns on During this time an instruction to the high speed counter of the same ...

Page 727: ...DT90047 ch1 R903B DT90048 to DT90049 DT90050 to DT90051 ch2 R903C DT91200 to DT91201 DT91202 to DT91203 ch3 R903D DT91204 to DT91205 DT91206 to DT91207 FP X Ry type ch0 to chB T type ch0 to ch7 FP0R ch0 to ch5 Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303 ch1 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90306 to DT90307 ch2 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90...

Page 728: ...N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to ID Description The number specified in S is set as the target value of the high speedcounter and when the elapsed value matches the target value the specified output Yn turns on by interrupt processing Specify the channel number of the high speed counter in n H 0 0 0 0 Specification of the channel of high speed counter pulse output Allowable range for specif...

Page 729: ...hen the values match to Y2 DF F166 HC1S H0 K10000 Y2 R0 High speed counter control start Execution of program 10000 0 R0 R9110 Y2 Targe value match ON The number of the high speed counter control flag varies depending on the channel used Regarding the channel number and control flag for each model refer to the table on the next page End of F166 control clear Elapsed value Target value Control flag...

Page 730: ... target value match output setting are not cleared even if a hardware reset is performed the elapsed value is cleared to 0 A check for double outptu with OT instructions KP instructions and other applied instructions is not performed on the outptu Y that is specified for target value match output If the control is cleared with F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the control of this instruction is cancelle...

Page 731: ...he pulseoutput channel and whenthe elapsedvalue matches the target value the specified output Yn turns on by interrupt processing Specify the channel number of the pulse output in n H 0 1 0 0 Specification of the channel of high speed counter pulse output Allowable range for specifying the pulse output 0 to 3 Specification of high speed counter pulse output 1 Specification of pulse output The targ...

Page 732: ...to Y2 DF F166 HC1S H100 K10000 Y2 R0 Pulse output control start Execution of program 10000 0 R0 R9130 Y2 Targe value match ON End of F166 control clear Elapsed value Target value Control flag The number of the pulse output control flag varies depend ing on the channel used Regarding the channel number and control flag for each model refer to the table on the next page FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 8...

Page 733: ...ns except F173 PWMH instruction This instruction can be executed before or after the execution of the above pulse output instruction A check for double output with OT instructions KP instructions and other applied instructions is not performed on the outptu Y that is specified for target value match output If the control is cleared with F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the control of this instruction i...

Page 734: ...ontains the data D The output coil that is turned off when the values match Yn n 0 to 7 Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR SV EV DT IX 1 IY 2 K H Index modifier n N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A N A S A A A A A A A N A A A A D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to IC on FPΣ FP X FP0R 2 ID on FPΣ FP X FP0R Explanation of ex...

Page 735: ...ted is specified only the WY memory is set reset Precautions during programming Set the high speed counter by the system register before using this instruction The high speed counter control flag turns on when the execution condition of the F167 HC1S instruction turns on and remains on until the target value match output turns off During this time an instruction to the high speed counter of the sa...

Page 736: ...DT90047 ch1 R903B DT90048 to DT90049 DT90050 to DT90051 ch2 R903C DT91200 to DT91201 DT91202 to DT91203 ch3 R903D DT91204 to DT91205 DT91206 to DT91207 FP X Ry type ch0 to chB T type ch0 to ch7 FP0R ch0 to ch5 Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303 ch1 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90306 to DT90307 ch2 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90...

Page 737: ... A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to ID Description The number specified in S is set as the target value of the high speedcounter and when the elapsed value matches the target value the specified output Yn turns off by interrupt processing Specify the channel number of the high speed counter in n H 0 0 0 0 Specification of the channel of high speed counter pulse output Allowable range for specif...

Page 738: ...hen the values match to Y2 DF F167 HC1R H0 K10000 Y2 R0 High speed counter control start Execution of program 10000 0 R0 R9110 Y2 Targe value match OFF The number of the high speed counter control flag varies depending on the channel used Regarding the channel number and control flag for each model refer to the table on the next page End of F166 control clear Elapsed value Target value Control fla...

Page 739: ... target value match output setting are not cleared even if a hardware reset is performed the elapsed value is cleared to 0 A check for double outptu with OT instructions KP instructions and other applied instructions is not performed on the outptu Y that is specified for target value match output If the control is cleared with F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the control of this instruction is cancelle...

Page 740: ...he pulseoutput channel and whenthe elapsedvalue matches the target value the specified output Yn turns on by interrupt processing Specify the channel number of the pulse output in n H 0 1 0 0 Specification of the channel of high speed counter pulse output Allowable range for specifying the pulse output 0 to 3 Specification of high speed counter pulse output 1 Specification of pulse output The targ...

Page 741: ...to Y2 DF F167 HC1R H100 K10000 Y2 R0 Pulse output control start Execution of program 10000 0 R0 R9130 Y2 Targe value match OFF End of F166 control clear Elapsed value Target value Control flag The number of the pulse output control flag varies depend ing on the channel used Regarding the channel number and control flag for each model refer to the table on the next page FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax ...

Page 742: ...ons except F173 PWMH instruction This instruction can be executed before or after the execution of the above pulse output instruction A check for double output with OT instructions KP instructions and other applied instructions is not performed on the outptu Y that is specified for target value match output If the control is cleared with F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the control of this instruction ...

Page 743: ...value are specified by a user program with a data table as shown on the following page The frequency is switched by the acceleration deceleration time specified for changing from the initial speed to the maximum speed During deceleration normally 30 steps the frequency is changed based on the same slope as during acceleration Table of areas used Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target va...

Page 744: ... output on direction output off Pulse output on direction output on Addition Target value less than current value Pulse output on direction output on Pulse output on direction output off Subtraction Precautions during programming If both the regular program and the interrupt program contain code for the same channel make sure both are not executed simultaneously Run the program referring to page 3...

Page 745: ... counter and pulse output is signed 32 bit values 2 The high speed counter continues counting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 3 The pulse output continues outputting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 4 The waveforms of pulse output are a duty cycle of 25 regardless of the designation of instructions 5 Even if the no count setting is specified with a pulse output ins...

Page 746: ...0 H 1002 DT 1 K 1000 DT 2 K 7000 DT 3 K 300 DT 4 K100000 DT 5 K100000 DT 6 0 Number of output pulse 100 000 300ms 300ms 7kHz 1kHz f 7000 1000 30 steps 200 Hz t 300ms 30 steps 10ms t f Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit n is number except 0 and 1 The value of S exceed...

Page 747: ...le as shown on the following page The frequency is switched by the acceleration deceleration time specified for changing from the initial speed to the maximum speed During deceleration normally 30 steps the frequency is changed based on the same slope as during acceleration Table of areas used Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area Directional output Near home input Home inpu...

Page 748: ...f t Fmax Fmin home input Precautions during programming When the control code lower order is H20 to H23 the home input is enabled after near home input regardless of whether deceleration has ended or is still in progress When the control code lower order is H24 to H27 the home input is only enabled following near home input after deceleration to the initial speed has been completed Even when home ...

Page 749: ... mode of FP0R 1 The elapsed value and target value of high speed counter and pulse output is signed 32 bit values 2 The high speed counter continues counting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 3 The pulse output continues outputting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 4 The waveforms of pulse output are a duty cycle of 25 regardless of the designation of instructions 5 E...

Page 750: ...2 DT 0 F0 MV K1000 DT 1 F0 MV K7000 DT 2 F0 MV K300 DT 3 R1 F168 SPD1 DT 0 K 0 DT 0 H 0022 DT 1 K 1000 DT 2 K 7000 DT 3 K 300 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit n is number except 0 and 1 The value of S exceeds the limit of specified range S 1 is less than K40 S 1 S ...

Page 751: ...ial speed Maximum speed Acceleration deceleration time Target value Movement amount Positioning start Pulse output stops when the upper limit of the internal elapse value is exceeded if rotation is in one direction only As a countermeasure reset the elapsed value zero clear before executing F168 SPD1 or F169 PLS instructions as with the program above The pulse output does not stop when the FP0R is...

Page 752: ...an instruction for JOG operations For that situation set the control code with combinations such as H12 incremental directional output off and H22 decremental directional output on The frequency and duty can be changed each scan This becomes effective with the next pulse output after this instruction is executed See below for the corresponding areas Channel no Control flag Data register for elapse...

Page 753: ...e and target value of high speed counter and pulse output is signed 32 bit values 2 The high speed counter continues counting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 3 The pulse output continues outputting even if data exceeds the FP0 range signed 24 bit 4 The waveforms of pulse output are a duty cycle of 25 regardless of the designation of instructions 5 Even if the no count setting is s...

Page 754: ...gram and the interrupt program contain code for the same channel make sure both are not executed simultaneously Run the program referring to page 3 487 when controlling the motor in one direction using the pulse output function Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit n is...

Page 755: ...n state The frequency and duty are specified with the data table on the right made by a user program Since the output is delayed near the maximum and minimum levels the set duty ratio will differ The duty can be changed each scan The frequency settings is only effective at the start of the execution of the instruction becomes effective after the next pulse output See below for the corresponding ar...

Page 756: ... 208 3 6 166 7 H4 2 4 416 7 Cannot be specified H5 1 2 833 3 Cannot be specified H6 0 6 1666 7 Cannot be specified H7 0 3 3333 3 Cannot be specified H8 0 15 6666 7 Cannot be specified H11 to H16 are supported by CPU Ver 2 0 and subsequent versions Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier ex...

Page 757: ...sponding control flag turns off and the excution condition is in on state For FPΣ For FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Channel no Output Output method Channel no Output Output method ch0 Y0 CW PLS ch0 Cassete Y100 CW PLS Y1 CCW SIGN Cassete mounting part 1 Y101 CCW SIGN ch2 Y3 CW PLS ch1 Cassete Y200 CW PLS Y4 CCW SIGN Cassete mounting part 2 Y201 CCW SIGN For FP X Tr type Channel no Output Output method ch0...

Page 758: ...g Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R903A DT90044 DT90045 DT90046 DT90047 ch2 R903C DT90200 DT90201 DT90202 DT90203 For FP X Ry type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R911C DT90348 DT90349 DT90350 DT90351 ch1 R911D DT90352 DT90353 DT90354 DT90355 Note Ch1 cannot be used for C14R For FP X Tr type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 ...

Page 759: ...se output from CW Pulse output on direction output off Pulse output on direction output on Addition Target value less than current value Pulse output from CCW Pulse output on direction output on Pulse output on direction output off Subtraction Precautions during programming If both the regular program and the interrupt program contain code for the same channel make sure both are not executed simul...

Page 760: ...n deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be specified for only FPΣ V1 4 or more and FP X Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz 2 Frequency Hz K constant Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set 1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 units Hz ...

Page 761: ...on time has 30 steps please use 30 ms units When it has 60 steps please use 60 ms units 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms no of steps x 1000 initial speed f0 Hz 5 If they are set without using 30 ms units or 60 ms units the values will be automatically corrected to the multiple values of 30 ms or 60 ms larger value Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Tu...

Page 762: ...N A A A N A Description Pulses are output from the specified channel when the corresponding control flag turns off and the excution condition is in on state For FPΣ For FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Channel no Output Output method Channel no Output Output method ch0 Y0 CW PLS ch0 Cassete Y100 CW PLS Y1 CCW SIGN Cassete mounting part 1 Y101 CCW SIGN Y2 Deviation counter clear mounting part 1 Y102 Deviation...

Page 763: ...age using the user program The frequency is changed using the specified acceleration deceleration time from the initial speed to the maximum speed During deceleration the frequency is changed based on the same slope as during acceleration If the frequency is set to 50 kHz or more specify a duty of 1 4 25 If the frequency for ch2 or ch3 of FP X Tr type is set to 10kHz or more specify a duty of 1 4 ...

Page 764: ...ial data register DT90052 off on off when near home input occurs The value in the elapsed value area during a home position return differs from the current value When the return is completed the elapsed value changes to 0 Home position return by means of near home input and home input Deceleration occurs when near home input occurs and pulse output stops after home input Operation varies depending...

Page 765: ...e position return mode II CW deviation counter clear 35 Home position return mode II CCW deviation counter clear 36 Home position return mode II Direction output off deviation counter clear 37 Home position return mode II Direction output on deviation counter clear H 0 Fixed Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be specified for only FPΣ V1 4 or more and FP X Frequenc...

Page 766: ...ear home input regardless of whether deceleration has ended or is still in progress When the control code lower order is H30 to H37 Home return mode type II the home inputis onlyenabled following near home input after deceleration to the initial speed has been completed Even when home input has occurred executing this instruction causes pulse output to begin If the near home input is enabled while...

Page 767: ... when The area is exceeded when an index modifier is used The n is outside specification range The data of S S 1 to S 4 S 5 are outside specification range The S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 With the FP X the pulse output has not been set by the system register FPΣ FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 768: ...he control code initial speed target speed acceleration time deceleration time and the target value is specified by creating data tables S to S 11 using user progrmas When accelerating the frequency is changed in the acceleration time specified from the initial speed to the target speed When decelerating the frequency is changed in the deceleration time specified from the target speed The decelera...

Page 769: ...ge of target speed Initial target speed Acceleratrion Deceleration stop Deceleration When changing the target value keep the trigger ON Acceleratrion Trigger Pulse output instruction flag Precautions during programming When the same channelis described in a normal programand interrupt program both do not execute them at the same time This instruction cannot be executed when the corresponding contr...

Page 770: ...me ms Deceleration time from the target speed Deceleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms S 10 S 11 Target value No of pulses Target value range K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 Table of type 1 S S 1 Control code S 2 S 3 Initial speed Hz Velocity range Frequency Hz S 4 S 5 Target speed Hz Velocity range Frequency Hz 1Hz to 50kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz S 6 S 7 Acceleration time ms Acceleration t...

Page 771: ... a parameter othern than the parameter used for the previous execution is specified the high speed startup cannot be performed Note The same parameter means that all the parameters other than the output assignment are the same Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Interrupt execution assignment 0 Execute in main program 1 Execute in int...

Page 772: ...le DT0 Control information Trapezoidal control Incremental CW CCW DT2 Initial speed Hz 1000Hz DT4 Target speed Hz 7000Hz DT6 Acceleration time ms 450ms DT8 Deceleration time ms 300ms DT10 Target value No of pulses 100 000 pulses Sample program2 Trapezoidal control type 0 With deceleration stop request With change of speed DF F1 DMV H10000000 DT0 F1 DMV K1000 DT2 F1 DMV K7000 DT4 F1 DMV K450 DT6 F1...

Page 773: ...R1 300ms 450ms R2 Time When changing the target value keep the trigger ON Change of speed 100 000 Pulse output instruction flag Output pulse number Frequency Deceleration stop Deceleration Data table DT0 Control information Trapezoidal control Incremental CW CCW DT2 Initial speed Hz 1000Hz DT4 Target speed Hz 7000Hz DT6 Acceleration time ms 450ms DT8 Deceleration time ms 300ms DT10 Target value No...

Page 774: ...speed Hz 25000Hz DT6 Acceleration time ms 600ms Acceleration time up to 50kHz DT8 Deceleration time ms 400ms Deceleration time from 50kHz DT10 Target value No of pulses 100 000 pulses Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Error flag R9008 Turns on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Turns on when n is out of the specified range Turns on when each data of S S 1 to S 4 S 5 ...

Page 775: ...input turns on after reaching the target speed After the position control starting input turned on the pulse output continues up to the target value and then decelerates and stops For using the position control staring input X0 X1 X2 X3 set the system register 402 When decelerating the frequency is changed in the deceleration time specified from the target speed The positioning control can be also...

Page 776: ... when the corresponding pulse output instruction flag to the channel started is on When rewriting during RUN is performed the pulse output will stop As for the position control starting input only the rising edge ON is detected The instruction cannot be started when the deceleration stop request flag is on Note that the methods to stop the pulse output in this instruction are only any of the follo...

Page 777: ...eleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms S 8 Deceleration time Deceleration time from the max speed 50kHz S 8 S 9 Deceleration time ms Deceleration time from the max speed 50kHz Deceleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms S 10 S 11 Target value No of pulses Target value range K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1 Whe...

Page 778: ...se output 1 Calculation only Interrupt execution assignment 0 Execute in main program 1 Execute in interrupt program The trigger is the level type Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 Output type Mode selection Target value CW CCW PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Elapsed value When positive Output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction...

Page 779: ...n when each data of S S 1 to S 4 S 5 is out of the specified range Turns on when S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 Turns on when S 10 S 11 is out of the specified range Turns on when the pulse output has not been set by the system register Turns on when the interrupt execution has been specified for executing the instruction in the main program FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info ...

Page 780: ...grmas When accelerating the frequency is changed in the acceleration time specified from the initial speed to the target speed After the position control starting input turned on the pulse output continues up to the target value and then decelerates and stops For using the position control staring input X0 X1 X2 X3 set the system register 402 When decelerating the frequency is changed in the decel...

Page 781: ...the methods to stop the pulse output in this instruction are only any of the following operations Turning on the position control starting input position control starting flag requesting the deceleration stop and executing an emergency stop The target speed cannot be changed with this instruction When the instruction is started during the interrupt program specify the execution in the interrupt pr...

Page 782: ...s S 14 S 15 Target value No of pulses Target value range K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger 2 When the initial speed ...

Page 783: ...ute in interrupt program The trigger is the level type Control assignment 2 1 Type 1 Output type Incremental Relative control The pulse specified for the target value are output Mode selection Target value CW CCW PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Elapsed value When positive Output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction output is ...

Page 784: ...range Turns on when each data of S S 1 to S 4 S 5 is out of the specified range Turns on when S 8 S 9 is out of the specified range Turns on when S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 Turns on when S 2 S 3 S 8 S 9 Turns on when S 14 S 15 is out of the specified range Turns on when the pulse output has not been set by the system register FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 785: ... A N A N A N A A n N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A N A Description When the corresponding control flag is off and the execution condition is in the on state pulses are output from the specified channel The pulses are output while the execution condition is on For FPΣ For FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Channel no Output Output method Channel no Output Output method ch0 Y0 CW PLS ch0 Cassete Y100 CW PLS Y1 C...

Page 786: ...1 4 25 should be specified If the frequency for ch2 or ch3 of FP X Tr type is set to 10kHz or more specify a duty of 1 4 25 Table of areas used For FPΣ Channel no Control flag Elapsed value ch0 R903A DT90044 DT90045 ch2 R903C DT90200 DT90201 For FP X Ry type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value ch0 R911C DT90348 DT90349 ch1 R911D DT90352 DT90353 Note Ch1 cannot be used for C14R For FP X Tr type C...

Page 787: ...alue outside of the specified range is written for the frequency area while the instruction is being executed the frequency output will be adjusted to either to the minimum or the maximum And when starting execution of the instruction an operation error occurs If the control code is changed after the instruction startup it will be invalid If the frequency is changed to a value outside the specific...

Page 788: ... constant Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set 1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz For counting method set the initial instruction execution frequency to 30 kHz or lower 3 Target value Absolut...

Page 789: ...output from the specified channels With the JOG operationtype the control code initialspeed target speed accelerationtime and deceleration time is specified by creating data tables S to S 9 using user programs With the JOG operation type 1 with target values the target value is specified in a range of S 10 to S 11 as well as the above items When accelerating the frequency is changed in the acceler...

Page 790: ...ency Hz S 2 S 3 Initial speed Hz Velocity range Frequency Hz 1Hz to 50kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz S 4 S 5 Target speed 1 Hz Acceleration time up to the max speed 50kHz Acceleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms S 6 S 7 Acceleration time ms Deceleration time from the max speed 50kHz Deceleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms S 8 S 9 Deceleration time ms Target value range Note Available for ...

Page 791: ...mental 1 Absolute Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only 0 Fixed Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 Without target values 1 Type 1 With target values Output type 0 without target values Mode selection Operation mode CW CCW PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Elaps...

Page 792: ... acceleration deceleration and initial speed When the deceleration stop is requested during acceleration deceleration is performed with the same slope of the deceleration time from the target speed In this instruction the operation is processed giving the acceleration deceleration time priority The initial speed may be corrected to enable accelerating decelerating within the specified time Sample ...

Page 793: ... execution condition is in the on state a PWM is output from the specified channel for the PWM output The PWM is output while the execution condition is on The data table shown at below indicating the frequency and duty is created and the values are specified by the user program The duty particularly when it is close to the minimum or maximum value may be off from the specified ratio depending on ...

Page 794: ... by the system register If a rewrite is executed during RUN while the system is operating pulse output stops while the program is being rewritten If the same notation is being used for both the ordinary program and the interrupt program make sure they are not both executed at the same time If a value over the specified range is written for the duty area while the instruction is being executed the ...

Page 795: ...y Hz Timing ms K0 1 5 666 67 K20 15 6 k 0 06 K1 2 0 502 51 K21 20 8 k 0 05 K2 4 1 245 70 K22 25 0 k 0 04 K3 6 1 163 93 K23 31 3 k 0 03 K4 8 1 122 85 K24 41 7 k 0 02 K5 9 8 102 35 K6 19 5 51 20 K7 48 8 20 48 K8 97 7 10 24 K9 201 6 4 96 K10 403 2 2 48 K11 500 0 2 00 K12 694 4 1 44 K13 1 0 k 0 96 K14 1 3 k 0 80 K15 1 6 k 0 64 K16 2 1 k 0 48 K17 3 1 k 0 32 K18 6 3 k 0 16 K19 12 5 k 0 08 Note When usin...

Page 796: ... K6 25 40 00 K7 50 20 00 K8 100 10 00 K9 200 5 00 K10 400 2 50 K11 600 1 67 K12 800 1 25 K13 1000 1 00 K14 1200 0 83 K15 1600 0 63 K16 2000 0 50 K17 3000 0 33 K18 4800 0 21 Other than the above Cannot be specified FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 797: ...A N A A A N A Description When the corresponding control flag is off and the execution condition is in the on state pulses are output from the specified channel ch0 or ch2 based on the contents set for the data table in which the first address is that specified by S For FPΣ For FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Channel no Output Output method Channel no Output Output method ch0 Y0 CW PLS ch0 Cassete Y100 CW P...

Page 798: ...1 4 25 If the frequency for ch2 or ch3 of FP X Tr type is set to 10kHz or more specify a duty of 1 4 25 Table of areas used For FPΣ Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R903A DT90044 DT90045 DT90046 DT90047 ch2 R903C DT90200 DT90201 DT90202 DT90203 For FP X Ry type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R911C DT90348 DT90349 DT90350 DT90351 ch1...

Page 799: ...le pointer exceeds the data register DT area during pulse output pulse output control stops and the high speed counter control flag R903A R903C goes off Always make sure that the target values are specified within the ranges indicated on the following page If a value outside the allowable range is specified the number of pulses output will be different from the specified value If a periodic interr...

Page 800: ...off subtraction counting 2 Frequency Hz K constant Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 units Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set 1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 units Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Initial speed Set Frequency 1 to 30 kHz or less 3 Target value K 214...

Page 801: ... R10 of the F174 SP0H instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R903A R903C goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10 000 and pulse output stops R903A R903C goes off Note With FP X refer to the table of areas used for the internal relay equivalent to R903A R903C Settings and program The frequency range is from 191 Hz to 100 kHz the duty 1 4 25 the operation mode is Incremental and th...

Page 802: ...ponding pulse output instruction flag is off and the trigger is on pulses are output from the specified channels according to the conditions specified in the data table which starts with the address specified by S If the elapsed value of the pulse output reaches the target value specified in the data table the pulse frequency is changed by the inerrupt operation When the elapsed value reaches the ...

Page 803: ...1 Frequency n Hz S 2 n 1 S 2 n 1 1 Targe value n No of pulses S 2 n 2 S 2 n 2 1 K0 fixed Table end Note If the frequency n is set to a value larger than 50kHz it will be corrected to 50kHz Note the following characteristics applied according to the value of frequency 1 1 When the frequency 1 is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be pe...

Page 804: ...y a value larger than the current value Absolute Count Subtraction Specify a value smaller than the current value Sample program Description of operation 1 When the trigger R10 in F174 SP0H instructionis on the pulsesare output at 1000Hz from the specified channel 2 When 1000 pulses are counted at 1000Hz the frequency changes to 2500Hz 3 When 3000 pulses are counted at 2500Hz the frequency changes...

Page 805: ...n error occurs If the data of the frequency 1 is 0 the operation ends without processing anything When the second frequency or later is 0 or out of the specified range the pulse output stops When the direction is reversed by execuitng the instruction with the specified target value the pulse output stops Do not execute this instruction in the normal program and the interrupt program at the same ti...

Page 806: ...f and the execution conditions are on For FPΣ For FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Channel no Output Output method Channel no Output Output method ch0 for X axis Y0 CW PLS ch0 for X axis Cassete Y100 CW PLS Y1 CCW SIGN Cassete mounting part 1 Y101 CCW SIGN ch2 for Y axis Y3 CW PLS ch1 for Y axis Cassete Y200 CW PLS Y4 CCW SIGN Cassete mounting part 2 Y201 CCW SIGN For FP X Tr type Channel no Output Output me...

Page 807: ... DT90200 DT90201 DT90202 DT90203 For FP X Ry type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R911C DT90348 DT90349 DT90350 DT90351 ch1 R911D DT90352 DT90353 DT90354 DT90355 For FP X Tr type Channel no Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 R911C DT90348 DT90350 ch0 R911C DT90349 DT90351 ch1 R911D DT90352 DT90354 ch1 R911D DT90353 DT90355 ch2 R911E DT90356 DT903...

Page 808: ...UN when pulse output is taking place more pulses than the setting may be output When using this instruction for FP X set the pulse output by the system register Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area is exceeded when an index modifier is used The n is other than 0 The data S S 1 to S 10 S 11 of data table are outside speci...

Page 809: ...f acceleration deceleration steps 7 1 Specification of control code specify with H constant Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 03 Incremental PLS SIGN forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 13 Absolute PLS SIGN forward on reverse off H 0 Fixed Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 ...

Page 810: ...e 2 Y axis movement distance 2 Composite speed x Y axis movement distance X axis movement distance 2 Y axis movement distance 2 Composite speed x X axis movement distance Example Even if the initial speed is corrected See 6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area 6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of eac...

Page 811: ... component initial speed CH2 component initial speed 10002 502 300 1000 299 626Hz 14 981Hz 10002 502 300 50 CH0 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 10 3 299 626 147 8 60 steps CH2 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 10 3 14 981 7 4 7 steps Note With FP X CH2 is CH1 FPΣ C32T2 FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 812: ... N A N A N A N A N A A N A Description When the corresponding pulse output instruction flag is off and the trigger is on pulses are output from channel ch0 X axis and ch2 Y axis or ch3 X axis and ch4 Y axis Channel no Output Output method ch0 for X axis Y0 CW PLS Y1 CCW SIGN ch2 for Y axis Y3 CW PLS Y4 CCW SIGN ch3 for X axis Y5 CW PLS Y6 CCW SIGN ch4 for Y axis Y7 CW PLS Y8 CCW SIGN The control c...

Page 813: ...ctions When using in application requiring precision check with the actual machine If both the regular program and the inerrupt program contain code for the same channel make sure both are not executed simultaneously Setting of data table The linear interpolation can be performed with either combination of CH0 and CH1 or CH2 and CH3 The acceleration time and deceleration time can be specified indi...

Page 814: ...t value are output Mode selection Target value CW CCW PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Elapsed value When positive Output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction output is on Addition When negative Output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is on Pulse output when direction output is off Subtraction Absolute Absolute valu...

Page 815: ...h will not be operated to 0 b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Note Infinite feed is not possible during linear interpolation 5 Component speed Initial speed and and maximum speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis component speed Composite speed x X axis movement distance X axis movement dis...

Page 816: ...s on when the composite speed designation satisfies Maximum speed S 4 S 5 50kHz Turns on when increment mode is designated and the value of current value movement distance is outside the range 8388608 to 8388607 Turns on when absolute mode is designated and the target value is outside the range 8388608 to 8388607 The acceleration time and deceleration time has not been set to the same value FP0R P...

Page 817: ...A N A Description Pulses are output from the channel ch0 for X axis and ch2 for Y axis when the corresponding control flag turns off and the execution condition trigger turns on For FPΣ Channel no Output Output method ch0 for X axis Y0 CW PLS Y1 CCW SIGN ch2 for Y axis Y3 CW PLS Y4 CCW SIGN Designate the control code composite speed target position and pass position by creating the data table S to...

Page 818: ...F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions The accuracy of circular interpolation may degrade if the scan time lengthens If both the regular program and the interrupt program contain code for the same channel make sure both are not executed simultaneously If you make the current position equal the target value when specifying the center position setting...

Page 819: ...remental CW CCW 02 Incremental PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 03 Incremental PLS SIGN forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute PLS SIGN forward off reverse on 13 Absolute PLS SIGN forward on reverse off H 0 Fixed Operation connection mode 4 0 Stop 1 Continue Rotation direction 5 0 from CH2 CW axis to CH0 CW axis 1 from CH0 CW axis to CH2 CW axis Circular method 6 0 Pass position sett...

Page 820: ...rotation direction setting Direction 1 CH2 CW CH0 CW Direction 0 CH2 CW CH0 CW 6 Circular method Pass position setting method The center position and the radius of the circular are calculated by specifying the pass and target positions for the current position Center position setting method The radius of the circular is calculated by specifying the center and target positions for the current posit...

Page 821: ...flag is on pulses are output from the specified channels to perform the home return operation For using the pulse output function it is required to set how to use input output by system registers C10 and C14 is relay output type therefore pulse output cannot be performed Description of operation mode Home return Type 0 The home input is available in all sections Home return Type 1 The home input i...

Page 822: ... S 3 Initial speed Velocity range Frequency Hz 1Hz to 50kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz S 4 S 5 Target speed Hz 1Hz to 50kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz Acceleration time up to the target speed Acceleration time range ms S 6 S 7 Acceleration time ms Acceleration time range ms K1 to K32760 Unit ms Deceleration time from the target speed S 8 S 9 Deceleration time ms Deceleration time from the target speed Deceler...

Page 823: ...Reverse ON PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF Elapsed value Forward Output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction output is on Addition Reverse Output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is on Pulse output when direction output is off Subtraction Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly When using the PLS SIGN me...

Page 824: ...l flags to each channel are on If rewriting during RUN is performed during pulse output pulses more than the setting may be output When performing the software reset count prohibition pulse output stop or near home operation refer to the F0 MV instruction pulse output Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Error flag R9008 Turns on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Turns...

Page 825: ...counted during the period specified by S2 is counted The average of the number of moving average is calculated with the specified period and stored in D and D 1 When the number of average is n 1 is output during the n counting period time after the execution of the instruction In the pulse period measurement in 1us unit a period of 1 pulse right after the execution of this instruction is counted a...

Page 826: ...urement request When measurement has not completed The measurement value is set to 1 when measurement has not completed although a time more than 350ms has elapsed after the previous request Even when measurement has completed after that the result is disregarded and measurement is requested again When measuring period in 1ms unit The elapsed value is set to 1 when the result of checking the perio...

Page 827: ... DT90307 ch2 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90310 to DT90311 ch3 R9113 DT90312 to DT90313 DT90314 to DT90315 ch4 R9114 DT90316 to DT90317 DT90318 to DT90319 ch5 R9115 DT90320 to DT90321 DT90322 to DT90323 Example of input pulse measurement setting Condition 1 Set the channel number to 0 and the number of moving average to 5 Specify the pulse period measurement in 1us unit 2 Set the counting period to ...

Page 828: ...he specified range S2 Turns on when the counting period is out of the specified range D Turns on when the range data to be stored exceeds the area Turns on when the same channel has been already controlled with the same sorf of instruction Turns on when the number of execution channels is 3 or more Turns on when the high speed counter has not been set for the specified channel by the system regist...

Page 829: ... A A A N A N A A S4 N A A A A A A A A N A N A A Description Register FP e screens specified with S1 with the method whereby S2 to S2 2 is specified For S3 specify the address where data for display in the upper is stored For S4 specify the address where data for display in the lower is stored When this instruction is executed the registered screen is displayed in the FP e panel To switch screens u...

Page 830: ...play method of the screen specified with S1 By writing the data below the screen display method is specified in a 3 word range from the area specified with S2 For example when DT10 is specified for S2 DT10 to DT12 becomes the area below S2 First word Specifies the method in which all units are displayed 15 Lower display setting bit 9 0 display 1 no display 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Unit display setting bits...

Page 831: ... 0 display 1 no display bit 8 1st last digit bit 9 2nd last digit bit 10 3rd last digit bit 11 4th last digit bit 12 5th last digit Decimal place display position bits 4 to 0 0 no display 1 display bit 0 2nd last digit bit 1 3rd last digit bit 2 4th last digit bit 3 5th last digit bit 4 3rd first digit Color designation bits 14 and 13 00 Undefined When specifying Green 01 Green 10 Red 11 Orange Ze...

Page 832: ...pecified for S Type of mode K0 N mode first screen K1 N mode second screen K2 S mode first screen K3 S mode second screen K4 R mode first screen K5 R mode second screen K6 I mode first screen K7 I mode second screen Precautions during programming If specifying the value other than 0 to 7 for S an operation error will occur This instruction cannot be used during the interrupt program Flag condition...

Page 833: ... register SWR SDT Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD In 1 SWR SDT K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A N A N N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to ID Operation In the 16 bit data stored in the area specified by S1 the bits of 0 specified by S2 are output directly and the bits of 1 are output by p...

Page 834: ...ution of this instruction R0 0 are as below are explained with a time chart WX0 Filter processing input data HA9BC DT1 Filter processing object bit H0001 DT2 8Filter processing time k500 WR10 Filter processing result HFFFF Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The filte...

Page 835: ...ues stored in data registers DT10 and DT11 x 0 01 seconds has elapsed R5 goes on Description This functions as a 32 bit addition type On Delay timer set in 0 01 second units Whentheexecutioncondition trigger is on theelapsedtime is added and whenthe elapsedvalue D 1 D 32 bits exceeds the set value the relays being used are turned on by the OT instruction which comes next in the program When the ex...

Page 836: ... out when operations are carried out the program should be set up so that operations are carried out every scan In cases such as programs where division is carried out or for jump or loop instructions where several operations are carried out during one scan or where it was not possible to carry out any operation during the scan correct results cannot be obtained How the Auxiliary Timer Works 1 Whe...

Page 837: ...0D on off Precautions When Using R900D If R900D is used and multiple auxiliary timers are being used always use R900D in the line following the auxiliary timer instruction X0 R900D Y0 F183 DSTM WR1 DT5 X1 R900D Y1 F183 DSTM WR10 DT10 Pair Pair When timer a which is activated by X0 on expires Y0 goes on When timer b which is activated by X1 on expires Y1 goes on If written as indicated below R900D ...

Page 838: ...High level Instructions 3 574 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 839: ...6 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area source S3 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area source D Starting 16 bit area of 48 bit area 3 words destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A ...

Page 840: ...iption The 16 bit data or 16 bit equivalent constant specified by S1 S2 and S3 is copied to the area 3 words specified by D when the trigger turns on Related instruction To transfer two types of 16 bit data at once use the F7 MV2 instruction Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an ins...

Page 841: ...t constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data source S3 32 bit equivalent constant or lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data source D Starting 16 bit area of 6 words 96 bit area destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A ...

Page 842: ...ontents of DT20 Contents of DT31 DT44 DT45 Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of DT30 S3 D S2 Description The 32 bit data or 32 bit equivalent constant specified by S1 S2 and S3 is copied to the area 6 words specified by D when the trigger turns on Related instruction To transfer two types of 32 bit data at once use the F8 DMV2 instruction Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and s...

Page 843: ...ing AND operation result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 0 DT10 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 DT1...

Page 844: ...red in the 32 bit area specified by D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr ...

Page 845: ...ring OR operation result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 0 DT10 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 DT1...

Page 846: ...ed in the 32 bit area specified by D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr c...

Page 847: ...peration result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 0 DT10 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 DT11 1 1 1 1...

Page 848: ...D You can use this instruction to check how many bits in two 32 bit data items are the same Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as...

Page 849: ...peration result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 0 DT10 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 DT11 1 1 1 1...

Page 850: ... D You can use this instruction to check how many bits in two 32 bit data items are the same Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is recognized a...

Page 851: ...32 bit data S3 Lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data which stores master data for combination or 32 bit equivalent constant D Lower 16 bit area of 32 bit data for storing calculated result Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A...

Page 852: ... specified by S3 1 and S3 and stored in the 32 bit area specified by D S1 1 S1 AND S3 1 S3 OR S2 1 S2 AND S3 1 S3 D 1 D When S3 1 and S3 is H0 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 is HFFFFFFFF S1 1 S1 D 1 D Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index ...

Page 853: ... S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A Explanation of example When the internal relay R0 is on conversion to the number of seconds from standard time is performed for the time data of the data registers DT10 to DT12 and the conversion result is stored in DT20 and DT21 H37 H03 DT10 DT11 DT12 higher ex H02 H26 H12 H12 H039CDD06 Binary value lower DEC 3 02 12 37 26 2002 60...

Page 854: ...31 higher Time data S BCD Years H00 H99 D D 1 Seconds data H00000000 HBC19137F lower Seconds H00 H59 Hours H00 H23 Months H01 H12 Second data D The correspondence table of Time data and Second conversion Time data S Seconds data D 01 01 01 00 00 00 H00000000 01 01 01 00 00 01 H00000001 01 01 01 00 01 00 H0000003C 01 01 01 01 00 00 H00000E10 01 01 02 00 00 00 H00015180 99 12 31 23 59 59 HBA368E7F 0...

Page 855: ...f modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A Explanation of example When the internal relay R0 is on the number of seconds for the data registers DT0 and DT1 is converted to the time data based on the standard time and stored in DT10 to 12 H51 H03 higher ex H02 H06 H15 H12 DT0 DT1 H039D0A6A Binary value lower Dec 3 02 15 51 06 2002 60 623 466秒 DT10 DT11 DT12...

Page 856: ...2 Minutes H00 H59 Days H01 H31 higher Time data D BCD Years H00 H99 S S 1 Seconds data H00000000 HBC19137F lower Seconds H00 H59 Hours H00 H23 Months H01 H12 Second data S higher lower Total Second Conversion Second data S Time data D H00000000 01 01 01 00 00 00 H00000001 01 01 01 00 00 01 H0000003C 01 01 01 00 01 00 H00000E10 01 01 01 01 00 00 H00015180 01 01 02 00 00 00 HBA368E7F 99 12 31 23 59 ...

Page 857: ...d WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description Converts the 16 bit data specified by S to gray codes when the trigger turns on The converted result is stored in the 16 bit area specified by D For detailed information about the gray code page 3 597 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on w...

Page 858: ...Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description Converts the 32 bit data specified by S to gray code when the trigger turns on The converted data is stored in D 1 and D For detailed information about the gray code page 3 597 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on an...

Page 859: ...EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description Converts the gray codes in 16 bit are specified by S to 16 bit data when the trigger turns on The converted result is stored in the area specified by D For detailed information about the gray code page 3 597 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the ar...

Page 860: ... Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description Converts gray code to 32 bit data when the trigger turns on The converted result is stored in the 32 bit area specified by D 1 and D For detailed information about the gray code page 3 597 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when t...

Page 861: ...0 1010 0000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 1000 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0001 1011 0000 0000 0001 1010 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 0000 0001 1111 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0000...

Page 862: ...High level Instructions 3 598 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 863: ...rce n 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area to specify bit position D Starting address of area which will be rewritten with bit column Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N ...

Page 864: ...g the 16 bit data of the area specified by S The contents of the bits of the 16 word data area with head address D that are not specified do not change n can be between 0 and 15 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If the specified bit position n is not in the range 0 ...

Page 865: ...will be read n 16 bit equivalent constant or 16 bit area to specify bit position D 16 bit area for storing converted data destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A...

Page 866: ...ion specified by n from the area specified by S and stores it in the area specified by D n can be set between 0 and 15 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If the specified bit position n is not in the range 0 n 15 If the conversion range specified with S overflows the...

Page 867: ...nary data stored in the area specified by S2 to ASCII codes using the conversion method of N according to 4 control characters specified by S1 The converted result is stored in the area specified by D Specifying the various items Specifying control strings and the meanings S1 M 16 D Converts 16 bit data to decimal ASCII codes M 32 D Converts 32 bit data to decimal ASCII codes M 16 H Converts 16 bi...

Page 868: ...tion less than H4 it is an error When converting 32 bit data to hexadecimal ASCII codes Specified range H1 to 8 When less than H8 the specified number of digits is stored from the lower bytes If the digit number of original data is larger with the specification less than H8 it is an error When converting to decimal ASCII codes Specified range H1 to F Source data is treated as signed binary data Wh...

Page 869: ...erts 16 bit data K1234 and K56 to decimal ASCII codes DT10 K 1234 DT11 K 56 1234__56 When No of converted data is 2 Starting position for storing is 0 Size of the area for storing is 4 F251 ATOB D 16 DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F250 BTOA 16 D DT10 H 204 DT 100 M DF FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 870: ...DT100 R0 F250 BTOA 32 D DT10 H 217 DT 100 M DF Converts 16 bit data H0123 and H89AB to hexadecimal ASCII codes DT10 H 123 DT11 H 89AB 2301AB89 When No of converted data is 2 Starting positionfor storing is 1 Size of the area for storing is 4 Normal direction F251 ATOB D 16 DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F250 BTOA 16 H DT10 H 214 DT 100 M DF For the reverse direction when 16 H is 16 H FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 ...

Page 871: ... is an error in the control string specified by S1 The direction of converted data is changed to the normal direction when the conversion format specified by S1 is in decimal The size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by N exceeds the rated value when the conversion format specified by S1 is in hexadecimal Rated value for 16 bit data 4 Rated value for 32 bit data 8 The No of the conver...

Page 872: ... using the conversion method of N according to 4 control characters specified by S1 The converted result is stored in the area specified by D Specifying the various items Specifying control strings and the meanings S1 Ranges of treated data M D 16 Converts decimal ASCII codes to 16 bit data 32 768 to 32767 M D 32 Converts decimal ASCII codes to 32 bit data 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 M H 16 Con...

Page 873: ... DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F251 ATOB D 16 S2 H 413 D M DF When converting by the above program About normal direction and reverse direction The conversions in the normal direction and reverse direction are available for hexadecimal ASCII data Example of converting 0123456789ABCDEF FPΣ FP X FP0R Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 874: ...data is 3 F251 ATOB D 16 DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F251 ATOB D 16 DT10 H 413 DT 100 M DF Examples of converting to hexadecimal 4 digits x 3 data Converts to 16 bit data in normal direction 001209AB000E DT100 H 1200 DT101 H AB09 DT102 H 0E00 When No of numeric data is 3 Starting position for reading is 1 Digit No of numeric data is 4 F251 ATOB D 16 DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F251 ATOB H 16 DT10 H 314 DT 100 M D...

Page 875: ...T101 K 67 When No of numeric data is 2 Starting position for reading is 0 Digit No of numeric data is 6 and converting to 16 bit data A decimal point is also counted as a digit F251 ATOB D 16 DT 10 DT20 DT100 R0 F251 ATOB D 16 DT10 H 206 DT 100 M DF Example of converting to decimal number with a decimal point x 2 data in case of comma deliminated data 1234 5 6 7 The last of character strings is a ...

Page 876: ...ere is an error in the control string specified by S1 The direction of converted data is changed to the normal direction when the conversion format specified by S1 is in decimal The size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by N exceeds the rated value when the conversion format specified by S1 is in hexadecimal Rated value for 16 bit data 4 Rated value for 32 bit data 8 Any code other th...

Page 877: ... A N A A 1 I0 to ID Operation Checks whether the ASCII codes stored in the area specified by S2 can be converted correctly or not using the conversion method of N according to 4 control characters specified by S1 Checks whether the character strings can be converted by F251 ATOB instruction Checks data before converting the data by F251 ATOB instruction If an error is found in the data controls no...

Page 878: ...The size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by N exceeds the rated value when the conversion format specified by S1 is in hexadecimal Rated value for 16 bit data 4 Rated value for 32 bit data 8 The No of the converted blocks specified by N is 0 The size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by N is 0 The ASCII code to be converted exceeds the area The area specified using the in...

Page 879: ...r of characters stored in the character string Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits Character 4 Character 6 Character 1 Character 3 Character 5 Byte 1 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 5 Byte 0 Example The example shows a character string data table specifying the following Character string size 10 Number of characters 5 Character data ABCDE 5 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 10 B A D C E DT4 DT5 DT6 Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits ...

Page 880: ...ng size 16 characters no specification of characters for DT0 F0 MV K16 DT0 R0 Character string size Example The example shows a data table specifying the following for DT0 character string size 20 characters number of characters 12 characters and character data ABCDEFGHIJKL R0 F0 MV K20 DT0 Character string size 20 characters Number of characters 12 characters Character data F0 MV K12 DT1 F95 ASC ...

Page 881: ...x modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specified with FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 I0 to ID Explanation of example When internal relay R10 is on data register DT1 and DT11 are compared In this case it is determined that S1 S2 and R900C goes on 4 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 10 B A D C Byte 1 DT4 DT5 DT6 Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 8 ...

Page 882: ... ABCDE ABCD ABCDE B ABCDE Comparison of character strings is performed in sequence from byte 0 one character at a time If one character string has fewer characters than the other it may still be handled as larger if a large character code is used when the comparison is made Example B ABCDE To specify a character string indicate the number of the area in which the character size and number of chara...

Page 883: ...g to be coupled S2 Character string to be coupled D Area in which the coupled character strings are stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specified with FP...

Page 884: ...gher 16 bits Lower 16 bits 8 10 2 1 3 B A D C E Designate with the user program Area where operation results are stored Precautions during programming If the result of the couplingoperationis larger than the character string size of D only as many characters as will fit in D are stored Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The spe...

Page 885: ...F259 LEN DT 0 DT 100 S Character string D Area in which the coupled character strings are stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specified with FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 I0 to ID F259 P259 PLEN LEN Number o...

Page 886: ...s stored in D Precautions during programming If the number of characters is larger than the character size string an operation error occurs Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The specified range is exceeded when an index is modified The number of characters is larger than the character string size Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723...

Page 887: ... is stored character string or character constant S2 Character string to be searched D Area in which the results of the search are stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A ...

Page 888: ...racter string specified by S2 The number of characters that are the same as resulting from the search is stored in D and the first detected relative position byte unit is stored in D 1 Precautions during programming Specify a number of characters such that S1 is less than or equal to S2 For the number of characters S1 1 in the character string on the search side designate the number of characters ...

Page 889: ...string S2 Area in which the character string is stored or constant data D Area in which the results of the search are stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be spe...

Page 890: ...am Precautions during programming The character data from D prior to the operation is cleared If the number of characters specified by S2 is larger than the number of characters in the character string specified by S1 the number of characters of the character string specified by S1 is sent If the number of characters specified by S2 is larger than the size of the character string of D data equal t...

Page 891: ...r string S2 Area in which the character string is stored or constant data D Area in which the character string is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specifi...

Page 892: ... program Precautions during programming The character data from D prior to the operation is cleared If the number of characters specified by S2 is larger than the number of characters in the character string specified by S1 the number of characters of the character string specified by S1 is sent If the number of characters specified by S2 is larger than the size of the character string of D data e...

Page 893: ...racter string position is stored or constant data S3 Area in which the number of characters is stored or constant data D Area in which the character string is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A S3 A A A A A A A...

Page 894: ...3 is larger than the number of characters in the character string specified by S1 from the position specified by S2 the number of characters of the character string specified by S1 is sent If the number of characters of the operation result is larger than the size of the character string of D data equal to the size of the character string specified by D is sent The position specified by S2 sets th...

Page 895: ...n is stored or constant data D Starting address of the area in which the character string is stored n Area in which the position of the character string is stored or constant data Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A A D N ...

Page 896: ...haracters specified by S2 is larger than the number of characters in the character string specified by S1 the number of characters of the character string specified by S1 is sent If the position of n is larger than the number of characters of the character string of D an operation error occurs If the number of characters in the operation result is larger than the size of the character string in D ...

Page 897: ...rea in which the character string is stored p Area storing the head byte position of the character to be replaced or constant data n Area storing the number of characters to be replaced from the source data or constant data Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f M Index modifier S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A ...

Page 898: ...from D prior to the operation is not cleared it is overwritten If the number of characters in n is larger than the number of characters in the character string S subsequent to the point designated with p replacement is done for the number of characters in the character string S subsequent to the point designated with p If the position specified by p is larger than the number of characters in the c...

Page 899: ...X WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the maximum value in the 16 bit data table between the area selected with S1 and the area selected with S2 and stores it in the area selected with D The address relative to S1 is store...

Page 900: ...e leading part of the other area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 901: ...r Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and the area selected with S2 and stores it in the area selected with D The ...

Page 902: ... maximum value the relative address of the first value found searching from S1 is stored in D 2 Precaution during programming Even if D 2 overflows the selected area it will still be stored and this may corrupt the data in the leading part of the other area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant w...

Page 903: ...WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the minimum value in the 16 bit data table between the area selected with S1 and the area selected with S2 and stores it in the area selected with D The address relative to S1 is stored ...

Page 904: ...e leading part of the other area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 905: ...ier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selectedwith S1 and the area selectedwith S2 and stores it in the area selectedwith D The a...

Page 906: ... minimum value the relative address of the first value found searching from S1 is stored in D 2 Precaution during programming Even if D 2 overflows the selected area it will still be stored and this may corrupt the data in the leading part of the other area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant w...

Page 907: ...er Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description The total value and the average value of the word data signed from the area selected with S1 to the area selected with S2 are obtained and stored in...

Page 908: ...verflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an instant when overflows underflows while calculating Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr ...

Page 909: ...ds Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description The total value and the average value of the double word data signed from the area selected with S1 to...

Page 910: ...caution during programming Even if D 5 overflows the selected area it will still be stored and this may corrupt the data in the leadingpart of the other area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are d...

Page 911: ... WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A Explanation of example When the S3 is K0 ascending order DT10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 K300 K10 K3 K 1 K1000 K 30 K100 K30 K1 K 3 DT10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 K 30 K 3 K 1 K1 K3 K10 K30 K100 K300 K1000 When the S3 is K1 descendin...

Page 912: ...Double sorting is used for the sorting method Data is sorted from S1 to S2 in order following the sorting procedure Note that the number of word comparisons increases in proportion to the square of the number of words thus more time will be required for execution when there are a large number of words Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an inst...

Page 913: ...eger device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A Explanation of example When the S3 is K0 ascending order DT10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 K25000 K 4000 K1500 K 2600 K100000 When the S3 is K1 descending order DT10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 K 4000 K 2600 K...

Page 914: ...that the number of word comparisons increases in proportion to the square of the number of words thus more time will be required for execution when there are a large number of words If S2 specifiesa higherword of doubleword data processingwill take place over the same area as if the lower word had been specified S1 S1 1 0 1 Double word data table n S2 1 S1 2 S1 3 S2 Lower word Higher word Specifie...

Page 915: ...s of data table used for scaling linearization D Area where output result Y is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specified with FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 I0 to ID Explanation ...

Page 916: ...x1 y1 Output value x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 xn 1 yn 1 xn yn X S1 Y D Precautions during programming Make xt greater than xt 1 xt and yt should be created as 16 bit data to indicate which line is specified If X S1 is a value smaller than x1 the value of Y D will be the value of y1 If X S1 is larger than xn Y D will be the value of yn The maximum value of n is 99 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on a...

Page 917: ...ta table used for scaling linearization D Area where output result Y is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL 1 I 2 K H f Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A 1 Cannot be specified with FP0R FPΣ and FP X 2 I0 to ID Explanation of exam...

Page 918: ... value x1 y1 Output value x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 xn 1 yn 1 xn yn X S1 Y D Precautions during programming Make xt greater than xt 1 xt and yt should be created as 32 bit data to indicate which line is specified If X S1 is a value smaller than x1 the value of Y D will be the value of y1 If X S1 is larger than xn Y D will be the value of yn The maximum value of n is 99 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Tur...

Page 919: ...mer Counter Register Index register SWR SDT Constant Index Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD In 1 SWR SDT K H Index modifier S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A N N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A A 1 I0 to ID Operation Executes the linear output according to the elapsed time from the start by performing scaling with the 16 bit output initia...

Page 920: ...ions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit the output time range specified by S3 is smaller than k1 or larger than k30000 FP e Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 921: ...ea where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data D The area where the output value is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A ...

Page 922: ... value S2 is stored in D as the output value When Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 the input value S3 is stored in D as the output value Output value D S2 S1 Input value S3 Lower limit S1 Upper limit S2 To perform upper limit control only set K 32768 or H8000 for the lower limit S1 To perform lower limit control only set K32767 or H7FFF for the upper limit S2 Flag conditions Error flag...

Page 923: ... the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data 2 words S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data 2 words D The area where the output value is stored 2 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A ...

Page 924: ... D 1 and D as the output value When Lower limit S1 1 and S1 Input value S3 1 and S3 Upper limit S2 1 and S2 the input value S3 1 and S3 are stored in D 1 and D as the output value Output value D 1 and D S2 1 S2 S1 1 S1 Input value S3 1 and S3 Lower limit S1 1 and S1 Upper limit S2 1 and S2 To perform upper limit control only set K 2147483648 or H80000000 for the lower limit S1 1 and S1 To perform ...

Page 925: ... the input value is stored or the input value data D The area where the output value is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A...

Page 926: ...e input value S3 the input value S3 minus the upper limit value S2 is stored in D as the output value When Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 zero is stored in D as the output value Output value D In this range zero is output Input value S3 Lower limit of deadband S1 Upper limit of deadband S2 0 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an ...

Page 927: ...or the input value data 2 words D The area where the output value is stored 2 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Expl...

Page 928: ... and S3 the input value S3 1 and S3 minus the upper limit value S2 1 and S2 are stored in D 1 and D as the output value When Lower limit S1 1 and S1 Input value S3 1 and S3 Upper limit S2 1 and S2 zero is stored in D 1 and D as the output value Output value D 1 and D In this range zero is output Input value S3 1 and S3 Lower limit of deadband S1 1 and S1 Upper limit of deadband S2 1 and S2 0 Flag ...

Page 929: ...here input value is stored or input value data D Area where output value is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Expla...

Page 930: ...lue S3 is greater than zero the input value S3 plus the positive bias value S2 is stored in D as the output value Negative bias value S1 Positive bias value S2 0 Output value D Input value S3 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modif...

Page 931: ...or input value data double words D Area double words where output value is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explan...

Page 932: ...3 1 and S3 is greater than zero the input value S3 1 and S3 plus the positive bias value S2 1 and S2 are stored in D 1 and D as the output value Negative bias value S1 1 and S1 Positive bias value S2 1 and S2 0 Output value D 1 and D Input value S3 1 and S3 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Tur...

Page 933: ...ult is stored 3 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example H45 H 0 Calculates the SIN of the angle 45 degrees H 0 H7071 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the SIN of the angle 270 d...

Page 934: ...ing is positive and 1 when the result is negative The result of processing stored in D 1 and D 2 is a BCD value within the range 1 0000 to 1 0000 The decimal stored in D 2 is rounded off to four digits Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S is not ...

Page 935: ...lt is stored 3 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example H30 H 0 Calculates the COS of the angle 30 degrees H 0 H8660 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the COS of the angle 135 de...

Page 936: ...ing is positive and 1 when the result is negative The result of processing stored in D 1 and D 2 is a BCD value within the range 1 0000 to 1 0000 The decimal stored in D 2 is rounded off to four digits Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S is not ...

Page 937: ...ult is stored 3 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example Calculates the TAN of the angle 60 degrees H60 H 0 H 1 H7321 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the TAN of the angle 135 d...

Page 938: ... 1 when the result is negative The result of processing stored in D 1 and D 2 is a BCD value within the range 57 2900 to 57 2900 The decimal stored in D 2 is rounded off to four digits Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S is not BCD value If data...

Page 939: ...Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example H45 H 0 Calculates the arc SIN of the value 0 7071 H 0 H7071 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the arc SIN of the value 0 5 H330 H 1 H 0 H5000 DT10 ...

Page 940: ...a range of 0 to 1 0000 in S 1 and S 2 The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0 to 90 or 270 to 360 in degrees Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S 2 S 1 and S are not BCD value If data specified in S 2 S...

Page 941: ...Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example H30 H 0 Calculates the arc COS of the value 0 8660 H 0 H8660 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the arc COS of the value 0 5 H120 H 1 H 0 H5000 DT10 ...

Page 942: ... within a range of 0 to 1 0000 in S 1 and S 2 The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0 to 180 in degrees Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S 2 S 1 and S are not BCD value If data specified in S 2 S 1 an...

Page 943: ...s Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example H60 H 0 Calculates the arc TAN of the value 1 7321 H 0 H7321 DT10 DT20 DT21 DT22 Calculates the arc TAN of the value 1 H315 H 1 H 1 H 0 DT10 DT...

Page 944: ...mal parts of the data each within a range of 0 to 9999 9999 in S 1 and S 2 The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0 to 90 or 270 to 360 in degrees Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data specified in S 2 S 1 and S are not...

Page 945: ...ta source D Lower 16 bit area for 32 bit area destination Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example The floating point data f 1 234 are copied to data registe...

Page 946: ...ws Positive f0 0000001 to f9999999 Negative f 9999999 to f 0 000001 Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F309 FMV cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds th...

Page 947: ...Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The real number data 2 words specified by S1 and S2 are added together when the trigger ...

Page 948: ...DT10 R0 F310 F DT10 DT20 DT30 F309 FMV f12 345 DT20 Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F310 F cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S1 1 and S1 and S2 1...

Page 949: ...Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description Subtracts the real number data 2 words specified by S2 from the real number data 32 bit specified by...

Page 950: ... DT10 F309 FMV f0 05 DT20 F311 F DT10 DT20 DT30 Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F311 F cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S1 1 and S1 and S2 1 and...

Page 951: ...r Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description Multiplies the real number data 2 words specified by S1 and the one specified by S2 when the trigg...

Page 952: ...uring programming For FP this instruction F312 F cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S1 1 and S1 and S2 1 and S2 If result of processing is outside integer range when int...

Page 953: ...Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The real number data 2 words specified by S1 is divided by the real number data 2 words ...

Page 954: ...n F313 F cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S1 1 and S1 and S2 1 and S2 If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D Th...

Page 955: ...r Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The SIN S 1 and S of an angle data units are radians specified by S 1 and S is calculated and the result stored in D 1 and D SIN S 1...

Page 956: ...at angle data be set within the following range 2π radians S 1 S 2π radians For FP0 this instruction F314 SIN cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S If result of p...

Page 957: ...er Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The COS S 1 and S of an angle data units are radians specifiedby S 1 and S is calculatedand the result stored in D 1 and D COS S 1 ...

Page 958: ... angle data be set within the following range 2π radians S 1 S 2π radians For FP0 this instruction F315 COS cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S If result of pro...

Page 959: ... f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The TAN S 1 and S of an angle data units are radians specified by S 1 and S is calculated and the result stored in D 1 and D TAN S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before ope...

Page 960: ... be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D Absolute value of S 1 and S is 5270...

Page 961: ...FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description SIN of the value specified in S 1 and S is calculated and the result an angle radians is stored in D 1 and D SIN 1 S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before operation...

Page 962: ...rror flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S S 1 and S is not within the range 1 0 S 1 S 1 0 If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processin...

Page 963: ... f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description COS of the value specified in S 1 and S is calculated and the result an angle data units and radians is stored in D 1 and D COS 1 S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before op...

Page 964: ...ror flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S S 1 and S is not within the range 1 0 S 1 S 1 0 If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing...

Page 965: ...ier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description TAN 1 the arctangent of the value specified in S 1 and S is calculated and the result an angle data units and radians is stored in D 1 and D TAN 1 S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real numbers ...

Page 966: ...gram Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry...

Page 967: ...ger device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The natural logarithm LN S 1 and S is calculated of the data specified in S 1 and S and the result is stored in D 1 and D LN S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is ...

Page 968: ...g R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The S 1 and S is not greater than zero If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized a...

Page 969: ...Y WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The exponent EXP S 1 and S is calculated from the real number data specified in S 1 and S and the result is stored in D 1 and D EXP S 1 S D 1 D The calculation is performed with the exponent base e equal to 2 718282 S...

Page 970: ...conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry flag R900...

Page 971: ...V EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The logarithm LOG S 1 and S is calculatedof the data specified in S 1 and S and the result is stored in D 1 and D LOG S 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real numbers be...

Page 972: ...ag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The S 1 and S is not greater than zero If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized ...

Page 973: ...ay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The real number data specified by S1 1 and S1 is raised to the power specified by the real ...

Page 974: ... For FP0 this instruction F323 PWR cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S1 1 and S1 and S2 1 and S2 The power of negative number data is not an integer If result of proces...

Page 975: ...rand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The square root of real number data specified by S is calculated and stored in the 32 bit area specified by D S1 1 S D 1 D Specifying the integer device with S the integer data is internally converted to real...

Page 976: ...lag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The S 1 and S is not greater than zero If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is specified in D 1 and D flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an insta...

Page 977: ...ndex register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Description Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data when the trigger turns on The converted data is stored in D 15 0 S Signed 16 bit integer data 15 0 D Floating point real num...

Page 978: ...ed using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit lag R900B Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 979: ...ant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data when the trigger turns on The converted data is stored in D 1 and D 32 bit integer data with sign 15 0 D Floating point real number data Lo...

Page 980: ...or flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit flag R900B Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 There are too many significant digits in mantissa of converted real number data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 981: ...erand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 1 234 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT20 DT10 DT11 f1 234 K1 When th...

Page 982: ...ution during programming For FP0 this instruction F327 INT cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 16 bit integer data flag ...

Page 983: ...d Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 12345 67 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f12345 67 When the real...

Page 984: ...d S 1 Higher word Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F328 DINT cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 3...

Page 985: ... Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example DT20 DT10 DT11 f1 234567 When the real number data 1 234567 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below When the ...

Page 986: ...n during programming For FP0 this instruction F329 FIX cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 16 bit integer data flag R900...

Page 987: ...elay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example DT10 DT11 f123456 7 When the real number data 123456 7 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below When the real nu...

Page 988: ... S 1 Higher word Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F330 DFIX cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 32...

Page 989: ... Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example DT20 DT10 DT11 f1234 567 When the real number data 1234 567 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below When the real n...

Page 990: ... during programming For FP0 this instruction F331 ROFF cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 16 bit integer data flag R900...

Page 991: ...Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 45678 51 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f45678 51 DT20 DT21 K4567...

Page 992: ...S 1 Higher word Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F332 DROFF cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S The converted data exceeds the range of 32...

Page 993: ...y Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 1234 567 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f1234 567 DT20 DT21 f1234 000...

Page 994: ...struction F333 FINT cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an instan...

Page 995: ...ay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A A A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 1234 567 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f1234 567 DT20 DT21 f1235 00...

Page 996: ...ruction F334 FRINT cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an instant...

Page 997: ... Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 60000 00 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f 60000 00 DT20 DT21 f60000 00 When the ...

Page 998: ...ogramming For FP0 this instruction F335 F cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed Phone 800 8...

Page 999: ... Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Explanation of example When the real number data 1234 567 is in DT10 and DT11 as shown below DT10 DT11 f1234 567 DT20 DT21 f1234 56...

Page 1000: ...fied in S the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified Precaution during programming For FP0 this instruction F336 FABS cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specif...

Page 1001: ... A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The data in degrees of an angle specified in S 1 and S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 and D Angle data radians Real number data 15 0 D Angle data degrees Real number data Lower word D 1 Higher word 15 0 S Lower word S 1 H...

Page 1002: ...Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in S 1 and S flag R900B Turns on when result of processing is recognized as 0 Carry flag R9009 Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 477...

Page 1003: ...r Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 and S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 and D Angle data degrees Rea...

Page 1004: ...ing programming When the constant or integer device is specified in S the integer device cannot be set in D For FP0 this instruction F338 DEG cannot be programmed in the interrupt program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is speci...

Page 1005: ...atingpoint data specifiedby S1 with that specifiedby S2 when the trigger turns on The comparison result is stored in special internal relays R9009 and R900A to R900C The following table lists the states of the carry flag R9009 flag R900A flag R900B and flag R900C depending on the relative sizes of S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 Comparison between S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 S1 1 S1 S2...

Page 1006: ...nd stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data are specified in S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1007: ... A A A A A A A A A A A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description Compares the floating point real number data specified by S1 with the data band specified by S2 and S3 when the trigger turns on This instruction checks whether S1 is in the data band between S2 lower limit and S3 upper limit larger than S3 or smaller than S2 The comparison res...

Page 1008: ...ions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data are specified in S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 and S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data are specified in S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 and S3 1 S3 S2 ...

Page 1009: ... A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A A Index modification of a real number is not possible Description The output value real number data stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not the input value real numberdata specifiedby S3 falls within the rangeboundedby the upperand lower limits real number data...

Page 1010: ...lly converted into integer data F347 FLIMT DT10 DT20 DT30 DT40 R0 When the constant K is specified in S1 S2 and S3 the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit If data other than real number data is specified in...

Page 1011: ...ea where the input value is stored or the input value data 2 words D The area where the output value is stored 2 words Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A A A...

Page 1012: ...ut Input value S3 1 and S3 Lower limit of deadband S1 1 and S1 Upper limit of deadband S2 1 and S2 0 Specifying the integer device with S1 S2 and S3 the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before operations continue F348 FBAND DT10 DT20 DT30 DT40 R0 Specifying the integer device with D the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data F348 FBAND DT10 DT20 DT30 DT40 R0...

Page 1013: ...rds S3 Area where input value is stored or input value data double words D Area double words where output value is stored Operands Operand Relay Timer Counter Register Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D N A A A A A A A A ...

Page 1014: ... value S3 1 and S3 Specifying the integer device with S1 S2 and S3 the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before operations continue F349 FZONE DT10 DT20 DT30 DT40 R0 Specifying the integer device with D the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data F349 FZONE DT10 DT20 DT30 DT40 R0 When the constant K is specified in S1 S2 and S3 the operations are the same as w...

Page 1015: ... DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and the area selected with S2 and stores it in the area selected with D 1 and D The address relative to S1 is stored i...

Page 1016: ...Higher word Lower word Higher word If there are several values which are a maximum value the relative address of the first value found searching from S1 is stored in D 2 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different The real number dat...

Page 1017: ... LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description This instruction searches for the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and the area selected with S2 and stores it in the area selected with D 1 and D The address relative to S1 is stored in D...

Page 1018: ...Higher word Lower word Higher word If there are several values which are a minimum value the relative address of the first value found searching from S1 is stored in D 2 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different The real number dat...

Page 1019: ... Index register Constant Index modifier Integer device Operand WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f modifier device S1 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Description The total value and the average value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to the area selected with S2 are obtained and stored in t...

Page 1020: ...er area An area overflow check is not performed Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different The real number data is outside possible operating range Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 ...

Page 1021: ... A A A A A A A N A A N A Description The real number data from the area specified by S1 to the area specified by S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first depending on the condition set with S3 If S1 S2 sorting does not take place The sort condition is specified as follows in S3 K0 Ascending order K1 Descending order Double sorting is...

Page 1022: ...S1 3 S2 Lower word Higher word Specified areas Lower word Higher word Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit S1 S2 The areas of S1 and S2 are different The real number data is outside possible operating range Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email i...

Page 1023: ... N A N A N A N A A A Explanation of example The output value Y is calcuated for the input value stored in DT0 referring to the data table which starts with DT10 and the result is stored in DT100 Description 1 Scaling linearization is performed according to the data table of the real number specified by S2 in the inputted real numerical value S1 and an output value is stored in D 2 An output value ...

Page 1024: ... S2 2n 4 S2 2n 6 S2 2n 5 S2 4 S2 4n 4 S2 4n 3 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT29 DT30 DT31 DT32 DT33 DT49 DT50 DT14 DT34 Data table linear table S2 S2 DT10 n K10 real numerical value real numerical value real numerical value real numerical value real numerical value real numerical value Input X Output Y Y D X S1 yn 1 yn 2 yn y2 y1 y0 Xn X0 X1 X2 Xn 2 Xn 1 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 R9008 It turns on w...

Page 1025: ...ral time and derivative time and the processing mode and cycle in the parameter table PID processing will be performed based on these settings Types of PID processing Reverse operation and forward operation When a process has been changed the vertical direction of the output can be selected If the measured value drops Reverse operation is specified to boost the output heating etc If the measured v...

Page 1026: ...e limit Parameter table settings S Control mode S 1 Set value SP S 2 Measured value PV S 3 Output value MV S 4 Output lower limit S 5 Output upper limit S 6 Proportional gain Kp S 29 S 7 Integral time Ti S 8 Derivative time Td S 9 Control cycle Ts S 10 Auto tuning progress S 11 PID processing work area For the FP0 use the 20 words S 11 to S 30 as the work area Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 W...

Page 1027: ...utput will increase or decrease when a change occurs in the process Reverse operation If the measured process value decreases the output will increase Example Heating Forward operation If the measured process value increases the output will increase Example Cooling Derivative type PID and proportional derivative type PID When the set value is changed the output changes Derivative type In general t...

Page 1028: ...ll be automatically adjusted and rewritten 9 Derivative time Td S 8 Specify the coefficient used for PID processing The set value 0 1 will be the actual derivative time The setting range is K1 to K10000 0 1 to 1000 seconds specify in increments of 0 1 seconds If auto tuning is selected for the specified control mode the set value will be automatically adjusted and rewritten 10 Control cycle Ts S 9...

Page 1029: ...lete after a minimum of three changes upper limit output lower limit output upper limit output If the auto tuning progress remains at 0 even after changes have occurred several times please try again after shortening control synchronization Ts Precautions during programming A 30 word area 31 words for the FP0 including the operation work area is required for the parameter table Be careful not to a...

Page 1030: ...p 5 The amount of control is held constant An offset remains Proportional control grows stronger as Kp is increased 2 Integral operation Integral operation generates an output which is proportional to the integral time of the input Output mi Offset e Setting signal SV Measurement signal PV e mi mi 1 Tiedt Integral operation In combination with proportional operation or proportional derivative oper...

Page 1031: ...ncreased In the case of pure derivative operation control can temporarily become ineffective if noise is input and this can have an adverse effect on the process being controlled For this reason incomplete differential operation is executed e mD 4 PID operation PID operation is a combination of proportional integral and derivative operation Kp Output MV Offset e Setting signal SV Measurement signa...

Page 1032: ... LD In 1 SWR SDT K H Index modifier S1 N A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A S2 A A A A A A A A A A A N A N A S3 N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A S4 N A A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A N A 1 I0 to ID Operation PID processing is performed to hold the measured value PV at the set value SP Writing OUT instruction immediately after this instruction enables the PWM output on off output similar to a te...

Page 1033: ...ge The input WXn of a temperature input unit can be directly specified k 30000 to k 30000 S3 Area to specify target value SP and control parameter 4 words It is recommended to use this area allocating to the hold type operation memory Setting range S3 Store set value SP It is necessary to specify by the instruction or an indicator k 30000 to k 30000 S3 1 Store proportional gain KP Actual gain is S...

Page 1034: ...of PID processing is stored k0 k 10000 to 10000 S4 1 Set the lower limit value of output value MV k0 Min k 10000 S4 2 Set the upper limit value of output value MV k10000 Max k 10000 S4 3 Set 100 output band range where PID control is not performed k0 k0 to 80 S4 4 Set control cycle TS Setting unit 10ms default value 1sec k100 k1 to 3000 0 01 to 30s S4 5 Set control mode Refer to the table below k0...

Page 1035: ...e only with PWM output Change the content of the control mode S4 5 to k1 to k3 using an instruction such as F0 MV instruction Example Change the control mode to the proportional derivative type from the derivative type that is the default Y0 F356 EZPID WR1 WX2 DT32710 DT100 R1 R1 F0 MV K2 DT105 2 When using an analog output unit for output 2 1 Set the bit3 of S1 to 1 in order to start ANALOG outpu...

Page 1036: ...e PV is smaller than set value SP this setting it has affect on reducing the arrival time to set value SP by performing 100 output Therefore when it is set to k80 100 output is performed up to 80 of set value SP and PID control starts from then When k0 has been set to the default value for this setting PID control is performed from the beginning 2 Fine adjustment of auto tuning 2 1 Correction of t...

Page 1037: ...et value Temperature During auto tuning KP TI and TD calculation PID control Auto tuning in reverse operation Time Set value SP Auto tuning bias value SP Auto tuning in forward operation Temperature KP TI and TD calculation PID control Time Set value SP Auto tuning bias value SP During auto tuning Note Even if starting auto tuning in the condition that measured value PV is close to set value SP au...

Page 1038: ...ach parameter of S4 1 to S4 9 is out of the setting range 2 When the area specified with S3 or S4 exceeds the upper limit of the specified operation device Internal operation specifications When the execution condition has turned on the operation work is initialized If each parameter of KP TI and TD is all 0 when PID operation has started they are initialized at 1 1 and 0 respectively And the oper...

Page 1039: ... 05 or older Use the default upper limit and lower limit values for using the MV holding function 2 For FP0R V1 06 or later Upper limit and lower limit values are held as well as MV value set MV value upper limit and lower limit values before executing this instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1040: ...fier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example When the trigger R0 turns on R9009 will turn on if there has been a change in data register DT10 since the previous execution Following this the internal relay R10 will also turn on Description If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution in...

Page 1041: ... example on preceding page be sure to add the trigger X10 for the F373 DTR P373 PDTR instruction before the internal relay R9009 carry flag If the always on relay R9010 is the execution condition this trigger X10 is not necessary Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when th...

Page 1042: ... FL I K H f modifier device S A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A D N A A A A A A A A A A N A N A N A A N A Explanation of example When the trigger R0 turns on R9009 will turn on if there has been a change in data register DT10 since the previous execution Following this the internal relay R10 will also turn on Description If the data in the 32 bit area specified by S has changed since the previ...

Page 1043: ... example on preceding page be sure to add the trigger X10 for the F374 DDTR P374 PDDTR instruction before the internal relay R9009 carry flag If the always on relay R9010 is the execution condition this trigger X10 is not necessary Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when ...

Page 1044: ... FL I K H f modifier device n A A A A A A A A A A A A N A A N A Description This instruction selects the current index register bank number Precautions during programming The bank number is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the starting address of the program If the program memory is 120K steps when the program is switched to the No 1 program or the No 2 program the index register ba...

Page 1045: ...ID of bank 2 I0 to ID of bank 3 R9010 I0 to ID of bank 0 F410 SETB H 1 0 1 2 3 Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The bank number is not from K0 to K15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1046: ...effective level thus previous data is overwritten The bank numbers of index registers used in interrupt programs subroutines and other sub programs should be specified in such a way that the F411 CHGB instruction is executed at the beginning of the sub program and the F412 POPB instruction is executed at the end of the sub program Precautions during programming The bank number is automatically set...

Page 1047: ...t before the end of the interrupt program before the IRET instruction END R9010 F411 CHGB H2 INT 0 R9010 F412 POPB IRET Main program Sub program Flag conditions Error flag R9007 Turns on and stays on when Error flag R9008 Turns on for an instant when The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit The bank number is not from K0 to K15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwt...

Page 1048: ...executed at the end of the sub program Precautions during programming The bank number is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the starting address of the program If the program memory is 120K steps when the program is switched to the No 1 program or the No 2 program the index register bank number is automatically set to 0 The push area has only one effective level Program example This i...

Page 1049: ...r bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No 2 program Special data register for file register bank DT90263 File register bank current value The current value of file register bank is stored DT90263 File register bank current value The current value of file register bank is stored DT90264 File register bank shelter number...

Page 1050: ...egister bank number 0 to 2 Precautions during programming The file register bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No 2 program Special data register for file register bank DT90263 File register bank current value The current value of file register bank is stored DT90263 File register bank current value The current value...

Page 1051: ...es not check changes made with the F415 CBFL instruction The push area has only one effective level Precautions during programming The file register bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No 2 program Special data register for file register bank DT90263 File register bank current value The current value of file register ...

Page 1052: ...High level Instructions 3 788 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1053: ...Chapter 4 Precautions Concerning Programs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1054: ...Precautions Concerning Programs 4 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1055: ...ol software Method using the FP Programmer II Rewrite method using the programming tool software Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50 1 Place the cursor on the value of K30 set for the timer 0 2 Press the Delete key of computer to clear the value 3 Enter a new constant of K50 and press the Enter key Rewrite method using FP programmer II Example of changing the set value of ...

Page 1056: ...f changing values using the boolean ladder non ladder mode input method available in the programming tool software subtraction is interrupted when the values are rewritten and starts again with the new value starting from the next scan When method of constant rewriting in the program is used the program itself will change Thus when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is ...

Page 1057: ...ll continue to run Operation based on the changed set value will be start the next time the execution condition changes from off to on With these methods the value in the set value area SV will change however the program itself will not change Therefore when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is turned on operation will take place as follows When a set value in the prog...

Page 1058: ...ethod 2 Method using the FP Programmer II Use the word data monitor function to read the set value area SV of the timer or counter to be changed and rewrite the value Example of changing the value of SV0 from K30 to K50 1 Execute word data monitor OP8 ENT OP 8 2 Read SV0 READ TM T SV 0 3 Clear SV0 HELP CLR 4 Write the new changing value WRT BIN K H 5 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www c...

Page 1059: ...ng the set value to K20 when input X0 turns on F0 MV K20 SV3 X1 X0 T3 Y10 When X0 turns on the set value of timer changes from 5 seconds to 2 seconds TMX3 K50 With the FP2SH and FP10SH it is possible to specify the data register DT as well the relay WR for handling word data and other similar areas as the set value area The set value can be changed by changing the value to be transmitted using the...

Page 1060: ... in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using FP Programmer II Operate the TOTAL CHECK function Key operation ENT OP 9 READ If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUP USE and the address will be displayed Using programming tool software NPST GR Excute the TOTALLY CHECK A PROGRAM on CHECK A PROGRAM If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUPLICA...

Page 1061: ...s if R0 were off The program is processed as if R0 were on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer instructions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the results of the operation at the greatest program address Example Output to the same output relay Y10 with OT SET and RS...

Page 1062: ...edge detection method An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger is detected switching from off to on on off Trigger Executed every scan on off Trigger Executed only one time Standard operation Leading edge detection operation Operation of instruction Operation of instruction on off on off The condition of the previous execution and the conditio...

Page 1063: ...P and LBL instructions F19 SJP and LBL instructions for FP C FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH only LOOP and LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instructions Subroutine instructions 4 3 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time Operation of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is...

Page 1064: ...struction is off to on at the second scan therefore differential output is obtained Example 2 CT counter instruction X0 Add R9014 X1 CT 200 X0 R9014 X1 CT 200 X0 CT200 counting operation RUN Power on Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clr...

Page 1065: ...E JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Example 1 Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions X1 DF Y10 MCE 0 X0 MC 0 Previous execution of DF instruction Previous execution of DF instruction Time chart 2 Time chart 1 X0 X1 Y10 The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the tim...

Page 1066: ...P instruction was not executed has not been changed and the execution condition X0 for the counter input has not changed R0 X0 Counting operation Time chart 2 Final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed The count is incremented because the count input changed from off to on after the final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed Counting operation Time c...

Page 1067: ...d are stored in DT9017 and DT9018 With the FP0R FP0 T32C FPΣ FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH the self diagnosis error codes are stored in DT90000 and addresses at which errors occurred are stored in DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data wh...

Page 1068: ...nu 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 28 4 The check of system register 26 is removed 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC Using FP programmer II Ver 2 1 Set the mode of the CPU to PROG 2 Press the keys on the FP programmer II as shown below ENT ACLR OP 5 0 3 Specify the register number 26 for the parameter to be set and read the p...

Page 1069: ...ctor is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared In the STATUS DISPLAY menu of the programming tool software NPST GR Ver 3 1 or later press the F3 key In FP Programmer II press the following keys ACLR OP 1 1 2 ENT SHIFT SC DELT INST An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be c...

Page 1070: ... IX are negative value Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD e BIN data conversion When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted X0 F81 BIN DT0 DT100 In this case if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 the data conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted X0 F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this...

Page 1071: ...T100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register X0 F0 MV DT100 IXDT0 Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of IX with DT0 acting as a base For example when IX is K10 the destination will be DT10 and when IX is K20 the destination will be DT20 In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple mem...

Page 1072: ...IXIY IXIX except FP2 FP2SH FP10SH I0I0 IAIA for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH When a 32 bit constant is modified the specified number and the following number are used in combination to handle the data as a 32 bit data The result of the modification is a 32 bit data In the FP0 FP e Lower 16 bit area Higher 16 bit area Contents of IX Contents of IY When using index modification with an instruction which handles...

Page 1073: ...nning from DT0 X0 F0 MV K0 IX X1 DF F0 MV WX3 IXDT0 F35 1 IX 1 2 3 1 When X0 turns on K0 is written to index register IX 2 When the X1 turns on the contents of WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IXDT0 3 Add 1 to IX In this case the contents of IX will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of X1 Contents of IX Destination data registe...

Page 1074: ...35 1 I0 1 2 3 X0 I0Y10 1 K0 is initially written to index register I0 2 When the X0 turns on the first time Y10 will turn on 3 Add 1 to the value of I0 From this point on the output destinations successively change as follows each time X0 turns on Input times of X0 Content of I0 Output destination 1st 2nd 3rd 0 1 2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwt...

Page 1075: ...ied by a digital switch 0 7 9 4 Programmable controller Timer time setting WX0 2 Digital switches WX1 Timer number setting R0 DF F81 BIN WX1 IX 1 2 F81 BIN WX0 IXSV0 1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IX 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and stored in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of IX Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 7...

Page 1076: ...1 DF F81 BIN WX1 IX 1 2 F80 BCD IXEV0 WY3 Timer elapsed value display Digital switches Timer number setting 1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IX 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by IX to BCD and output it to word external output relay WY3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1077: ... instruction as shown in the examples at below BCD arithmetic instructions F40 through F58 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 through F38 as operation in the programmable controller takes place in binary Input from a digital switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 BIN 1 9 9 2 Programmable con...

Page 1078: ...D Conversion using F80 BCD instruction 7 segment display 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 9 9 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 Data processed in the programmable controller BIN data Data outputted from programmable controller BCD data Programmable controller Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1079: ...Y10 X1 X2 TMX5 K30 ANS X0 Y10 X1 X2 TMX 5 K 30 X0 Program in which the example 2 is rewritten Program example 3 DF Y11 X2 X3 X0 Y10 X1 PSHS ANS DF Y11 X2 X3 X0 Y10 X1 Program in which the example 3 is rewritten When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS push stack PSHS read stack RDS or...

Page 1080: ...ifferential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right shift registers are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value...

Page 1081: ...he online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The transfer data screen will open Select Condition to open Communication Setting screen Change the value for Timeout Click OK button to comp...

Page 1082: ...ontinue F171 SPDH Pulse output with channel specification Home position return Stop F172 PLSH Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation Stop F173 PWMH PWM output with channel specification Continue F174 SP0H Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table control operation Continue F175 SPSH Pulse output Linear interpolation Stop F176 SPCH Pulse output Circular interpolat...

Page 1083: ...ctions If an instruction written in block a is de leted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Ifdeleted theoutputmemoryareawillbe held MC MCE When writing MC MCE instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair Writing or deleting a single instruction dur ing RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode CALL SUB RET A subroutine is a...

Page 1084: ...he input device 2 Processing of external output Y Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input ouput in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of cont...

Page 1085: ...written according to the results of operation For medium sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH For the relay and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1086: ...call The subroutine of the second pro gram cannot be called up The subroutine of the first program cannot be called up SUB Subroutine entry 100 100 JP Jump 255 However jumping to the second program is not possible 255 However jumping to the first program is not possible LBL Label 255 255 INT Interrupt program Can be written in the first program only Cannot be used SSTP Step ladder Can be written i...

Page 1087: ...st program has completed At the points when the first program or the second program starts the following settings will be auto matically selected Index register bank 0 File register bank 0 Program switching method with FPWIN GR Select Edit Switch Programming Area in the menu bar to change the program area First program Second program Note The monitor data in the tool software is the data monitor w...

Page 1088: ...Precautions Concerning Programs 4 36 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1089: ...Chapter 5 Appendix Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1090: ...ers for FPΣ 5 78 5 1 11 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPΣ 5 84 5 1 12 Table of Special Data Registers for FPΣ 5 93 5 1 13 Table of System Registers for FP X 5 107 5 1 14 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP X 5 119 5 1 15 Table of Special Data Registers for FP X 5 130 5 1 16 Table of System Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 5 151 5 1 17 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP1 FP M FP2 FP2S...

Page 1091: ...ings System registers 35 and 36 These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote I O is started and the remote I O update timing 7 MEWNET W0 MEWNET W P PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W0 MEWNET W P PC PLC link communication Note The default valu...

Page 1092: ...e in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool port COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off...

Page 1093: ... as shown in the table below Timer 100 points No 0 to No 99 Counter 44 points No 100 to No 143 Setting example To increase the number of timers to 120 change the value of system register 5 to K120 For T32 set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting system register 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by s...

Page 1094: ...nter Hold type 16 points elapsed values C128 to C143 Non hold type 880 points R0 to R54F 55 words WR0 to WR54 Internal relay Hold type 128 points R550 to R62F 8 words WR55 to WR62 Non hold type 6112 words DT0 to DT6111 Data register Hold type 32 words DT6112 to DT6143 With the T32 set each relay and register to a hold type or non hold type For normal situations set the system registers 5 and 6 to ...

Page 1095: ...ting for internal relays in word units Available type T32 10 K10 0 to 63 K0 to K63 8 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers Available type T32 0 K0 0 to 16384 K0 to K16384 Hold Non hold 14 Hold or non hold setting for step ladder process Available type T32 Non hold K1 Hold K10 Non hold K1 20 Disable or enable setting for duplicated output Disable K0 Disable will be syntax error ...

Page 1096: ... input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Direction decision X0 X1 Direction decision X0 X1 Reset input X2 Input setting 400 High speed counter mode settings X0 to X2 Setting by progra mming tool software Do not set X1 as high speed counter CH1 Do not set X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 Note1 If the operat...

Page 1097: ...individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH1 is invalid Note2 If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr c...

Page 1098: ...h speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 Input setting 401 High speed counter mode settings X3 to X5 Setting by progra mming tool soft ware H0 CH2 CH3 Note1 If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH3 is invalid Note2 If reset input settings overlap the s...

Page 1099: ... as interrupts and X0 and X1 are set as interrupt inputs when going from on to off Note1 With the TOOL software 0 or 1 is set for each bit on the screen in the setting for system register 403 Note2 If system register 400 to 403 are set simultaneously for the same inptu relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input When the high speed counter is be...

Page 1100: ... Specify the setting contents using H constants When connecting a modem set the unit number to 1 with system register 410 Tool port setting 414 Baud rate setting Setting by program ming tool software 9600 H0 0 9600 bps 1 19200 bps Tool port RS232C port setting 414 Baud rate setting for tool port and RS232C port Setting by FP pro grammer II H1 If 19200 bps is set for both the tool port and RS232C p...

Page 1101: ...t 1 2 The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Start code STX not exist STX exist Using FP programmer II Specify the setting contents using H constants 414 Baud rate setting Setting by programming tool software 9600 H1 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 1200 b...

Page 1102: ...659 K0 to K1659 C32C SL1 0 to 6143 K0 to K6143 T32C 0 to 16383 K0 to K16383 C10C C14 C C16C 1660 K1660 0 to 1660 K0 to K1660 C32C SL1 6144 K6144 0 to 6144 K0 to K6144 418 Capacity setting for reception buffer T32C 16384 K16384 0 to 16384 K0 to K16384 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1103: ...flag Turns on for an instant when an overflow or underflow occurs when 1 is set by one of the shift instructions R900A Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the F60 CMP to F63 DWIN comparison instructions R900B Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arit...

Page 1104: ...tions in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 s cycles R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles R901E 1 min clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles R901F Not used R9020 RUN ...

Page 1105: ...n status flag Turns on when communication is taking place with an S LINK input Ooutput unit R9037 RS232C communica tion error flag Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs R9038 RS232C reception completed flag Turns on when a terminator is received during the serial data communicating R9039 RS232C transmission completed flag Turns on while data is not send during the serial data co...

Page 1106: ...015 DT90016 DT9016 Auxiliary register for operation The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 DT90015 when F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT9015 and DT9016 DT90015 and DT90016 when F33 D or F53 DB instruction is executed DT90017 DT9017 Operation error address hold After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred ...

Page 1107: ...nterrupted but are canceled when the power supply is turned on again ERR4 is held To cancel it repair the disconnected wire in the S LINK syste or whatever iscausing the problem and then either turn the power to the FP0 on again press the SET switch to reset it or turn the power supply on again on the S LINK unit side Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1108: ...d as a single unit This is invalid however if an ERR4 error is in progress If ERR4 occurs DT90022 DT9022 Scan time current value Note The current scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 K50 indicates 5 ms Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when...

Page 1109: ...4 The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored K0 periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 10ms to 30s DT90028 DT9028 Not used DT90029 DT9029 Not used DT90030 Note2 DT9030 Note2 DT90031 Note2 DT9031 Note2 DT90032 Note2 DT9032 Note2 DT90033 Note2 DT9033 Note2 DT90034 Note2 DT9034 Note2 DT90035 Note2 DT9035 Note2 Character storage by F149 MSG instruction The contents of the specified message ...

Page 1110: ...or the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset values can only be read and cannot be written DT90048 DT9048 DT90049 DT9049 High speed counter elapsed value area for ch1 Note1 The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the high spe...

Page 1111: ...uction H8 1000 Perform software reset and stop pulse output H9 1001 The 16 bits of DT9052 DT90052 are allocated in groups of four to high speed channels 0 to 3 as shown below A hardware reset disable is only effective when using the reset input X2 and X5 In all other cases it is ignored When using pulse output a hardware reset input is equivalent to an home point proximate input DT90053 Real Time ...

Page 1112: ...nth day hour minute second and day of the week data for the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar is stored The built in Real Time Clock Clock Calendar will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time Clock Clock Calendar can be set the time set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 MV instruction As a day of the week is not a...

Page 1113: ... are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if...

Page 1114: ... DT9062 Process number 32 to 47 DT90063 DT9063 Process number 48 to 63 DT90064 DT9064 Process number 64 to 79 DT90065 DT9065 Process number 80 to 95 DT90066 DT9066 Process number 96 to 111 DT90067 DT9067 Step ladder process Process number 112 to 127 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on 1 Monitor u...

Page 1115: ...uted These preset values can only be read and cannot be written DT90108 DT9108 DT90109 DT9109 High speed counter elapsed value area for ch3 Note1 The elapsed value 24 bit data of the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9108 and DT9109 DT90108 and DT90109 The v...

Page 1116: ...f operation Dis abled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not issued and the ERROR LED does not light Action on error 4 Alarm battery error Operating setting when battery error occurs Disabled Ena bled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR LED lights 31 Wait time setting for multi frame communication 6500 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms Time set ting 34...

Page 1117: ...X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Two phase input X3 X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X5 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 Incremental decremental ...

Page 1118: ...ister 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in part 2 of system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and 403 Note4 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultane...

Page 1119: ...ion format setting Data lenght bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX ...

Page 1120: ...n an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT9018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed R900A Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instruction...

Page 1121: ...type Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control R9016 Not used R9017 Not used R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s cycles R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations i...

Page 1122: ...G instruction is executed R9027 Not used R9028 Not used R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts R902A Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Not used R902D Not used R902E Not used R902F Not used Pho...

Page 1123: ...eral purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication R903A High speed counter control flag ch0 Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F168 SPD1 to F170 PWM are executed R903B High speed counter control flag ch1 Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F...

Page 1124: ... is executed The value can be read and written by executing the F0 MV instruction DT9015 DT9016 Operation auxiliary register for division instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT9015 and DT9016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is executed The value can be...

Page 1125: ...gister for interrupts The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display A N A DT9026 Not used N A N A DT9027 Periodical interrupt interval INT24 The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored K0 periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s A N A DT9028 Not used DT9029 Not used N A N A DT9030 Message 0 DT9031 Messag...

Page 1126: ...by the system Battery A N A DT9044 DT9045 High speed counter elapsed value For CH0 The elapsed value 24 bit data of the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing F1 DMV instruction A A DT9046 DT9047 High speed counter target value For CH0 The targe value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Targe...

Page 1127: ...truction is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction A N A DT9052 High speed counter and pulse output control flag A value can be written with F0 MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting N A A DT9053 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar monitor hour minute Hour and minute data of the Real T...

Page 1128: ...ck Calendar can be set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 MV instruction see example for DT90058 A A DT9058 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar time setting By setting the highest bit of DT9058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT9054 to DT9057 by the F0 MV instruction After the time is set DT9058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instructi...

Page 1129: ...2 to 47 DT9063 Step ladder process 48 to 63 DT9064 Step ladder process 64 to 79 DT9065 Step ladder process 80 to 95 DT9066 Step ladder process 96 to 111 DT9067 Step ladder process 112 to 127 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on Monitor using binary display A programming tool software can be used t...

Page 1130: ...d counter related instruction is executed The value can be read by executing the F1 DMV instruction A N A DT9108 DT9109 High speed counter elapsed value For ch3 The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing the F1 DMV instruction A A DT9110 DT9111 High speed counter target value For ch3 The target value 24 bit data of the hig...

Page 1131: ...r for PC PLC link relays for PC PLC link 1 T32 F32 64 64 to 128 12 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers for PC PLC link 0 T32 F32 0 0 to 128 Hold Non hold 2 13 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers for PC PLC link 1 T32 F32 128 128 to 256 20 Disable or enable setting for duplicated output Disabled Disabled Enabled 23 Operation setting when an I O verification...

Page 1132: ...Normal reverse PC PLC link 0 set ting 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 16 1 to 16 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 64 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 128 words 52 Starting word number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words 54 Starting number for link data register tranmiss...

Page 1133: ...ter CH3 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 CH4 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Two phase input X6 X7 Individual input X6 X7 Incremental decremental control input X6 X7 Controller ...

Page 1134: ...t to the pulse output PWM output cannot be used as the normal output Note2 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3 When using the home return function of the pulse output always set the home input In that case X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high speed counter Note3 C16 type For performing the home return for the pulse output CH0 with deviation counter clear the above Y...

Page 1135: ...pose serial communication PC PLC link MODBUS RTU 412 Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled 413 Communication format setting Data lenght bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified...

Page 1136: ...X4 to X7 432 Controller input time constant setting 2 X8 to XB C32 T32 F32 Cont roller input time cons tant set tings 433 Controller input time constant setting 2 XC to XF C32 T32 F32 1 ms None 0 1 ms 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms Note X6 and X7 is invalid for C10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1137: ... This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed R900A Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 R900B Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become...

Page 1138: ... for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control R9016 Not used R9017 Not used R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 01 sec cycles R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cyc...

Page 1139: ...rupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Sample point flag Sampling by the instruction 0 Sampling at constant time intervals 1 R902D Sample trace end flag When the sampling operation stops 1 When the sampling operation starts 0 R902E Sampling stop trigger flag When the ...

Page 1140: ...ion Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication R9039 COM port transmission done flag during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication R903A Not used R903B Not used R903C Not used R903D Not used R903...

Page 1141: ...ted R9045 COM port SEND RECV instruction execution end flag Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions as follows Off No abonormality detected On An abnormality detected communication error End code DT90124 R9046 Not used R9047 Not used R9048 Not used R9049 Not used R904A Not used R904B Not used R904C to R904F Not used A Available N...

Page 1142: ...when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode R9068 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode R9069 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mo...

Page 1143: ... when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9078 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9079 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Unit No 12 Turns on when Unit No 12 is i...

Page 1144: ...r when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode R9088 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9089 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode...

Page 1145: ... when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9098 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Unit No 12 Turns on when Unit No 12 is i...

Page 1146: ...21 PLS CH1 R9122 PLS CH2 R9123 Pulse output instruction flag PLS CH3 Turns on while the pulses are being output using F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH F174 SP0H F175 SPSH F177 HOME instructions R9124 to R912F Not used R9130 PLS CH0 R9131 PLS CH1 R9132 PLS CH2 R9133 Pulse output control flag PLS CH3 Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control using F166 HC1S F167 HC1R instructions Turns of...

Page 1147: ... Not used N A N A DT90005 Not used N A N A DT90006 Not used N A N A DT90007 Not used N A N A DT90008 Not used N A N A DT90009 Not used N A N A When the state of installation of FP0 expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary display DT90010 Extension right side I O verify error unit 0 to 3 A N A DT90011 Not use...

Page 1148: ...st operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display A N A DT90018 Operation error address latest type The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address A N A DT90019 2 5 ms ring counter Note1 The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms H0 to HFFFF Difference between the values of t...

Page 1149: ...sing the instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display A N A DT90026 Not used N A N A DT90027 Periodical interrupt interval INT24 The value set by ICTL instruction is stored K0 periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s A N A DT90028 Sample trace interval K0 Sampling by the SMPL instruction K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s A N A DT90029 Not used N A N ...

Page 1150: ...90039 Not used N A N A DT90040 Not used N A N A DT90041 Not used N A N A DT90042 Not used N A N A DT90043 Not used N A N A DT90044 Not used N A N A DT90045 Not used N A N A DT90046 Not used N A N A DT90047 Not used N A N A DT90048 Not used N A N A DT90049 Not used N A N A DT90050 Not used N A N A DT90051 Not used N A N A DT90052 High speed counter control flag The pulse output instruction can be c...

Page 1151: ...ng DT90052 Pulse output control flag A value can be written with F0 MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting A A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1152: ... only DT90057 Clock calender setting day of the week T32 only The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the clock calender is stored The built in clock calender will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The clock calender can be set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 MV instruction see example for D...

Page 1153: ... the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 on At the time of coorection if between 0 and 29 s...

Page 1154: ...rocess 176 to 191 DT90072 Step ladder process 192 to 207 DT90073 Step ladder process 208 to 223 DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 DT90075 Step ladder process 240 to 255 DT90076 Step ladder process 256 to 271 DT90077 Step ladder process 272 to 287 DT90078 Step ladder process 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process 304 to 319 DT90080 Step ladder process 320 to 335 DT90081 Step ladder process 336...

Page 1155: ...adder process 480 to 495 DT90091 Step ladder process 496 to 511 DT90092 Step ladder process 512 to 527 DT90093 Step ladder process 528 to 543 DT90094 Step ladder process 544 to 559 DT90095 Step ladder process 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder process 576 to 591 DT90097 Step ladder process 592 to 607 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit correspo...

Page 1156: ...T90111 Step ladder process 816 to 831 DT90112 Step ladder process 832 to 847 DT90113 Step ladder process 848 to 863 DT90114 Step ladder process 864 to 879 DT90115 Step ladder process 880 to 895 DT90116 Step ladder process 896 to 911 DT90117 Step ladder process 912 to 927 DT90118 Step ladder process 928 to 943 DT90119 Step ladder process 944 to 959 DT90120 Step ladder process 960 to 975 DT90121 Ste...

Page 1157: ...ations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms A N A DT90148 The number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90150 The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the regis...

Page 1158: ...T90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 No of times underfined commands have been received DT90175 No of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occ...

Page 1159: ... No 4 or 12 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90236 System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90237 System regis ter 42 and 43 DT90238 System regis ter 44 and 45 DT90239 PC PLC link Unit station No 5 or 13 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example When DT90219 is 0 When the system r...

Page 1160: ...er link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example when DT90219 is 0 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left col...

Page 1161: ...te DT90310 Lower words A A Note DT90311 Target value area Higher words HSC CH2 The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A A Note DT90312 Lower words A A Note DT90313 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for input X3 of the main unit A A Note DT90314 Lower words A A Note DT90315 Target value area Higher words HSC CH3 The target value is set when instru...

Page 1162: ... used N A N A DT90338 Not used N A N A DT90339 Not used N A N A DT90340 Not used N A N A DT90341 Not used N A N A DT90342 Not used N A N A DT90343 Not used N A N A DT90344 Not used N A N A DT90345 Not used N A N A DT90346 Not used N A N A DT90347 Not used N A N A DT90348 Not used N A N A DT90349 Not used N A N A DT90350 Not used N A N A DT90351 Not used N A N A DT90352 Not used N A N A DT90353 Not...

Page 1163: ...N A N A DT90377 Not used N A N A DT90378 Not used N A N A DT90379 Not used N A N A DT90380 PLS CH0 A N A DT90381 PLS CH1 A N A DT90382 PLS CH2 A N A DT90383 Control flag monitor area Transistor output type only PLS CH3 When pulse output control is executed by F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH A N A DT90384 Not used N A N A DT90385 Not used N A N A...

Page 1164: ...elapsed value corsses over this position when changing the speed acceleration cannot be performed A N A DT90410 Lower words A A DT90411 Elapsed value area Higher words A A DT90412 Lower words A N A DT90413 Target value area Higher words A N A DT90414 Lower words A N A DT90415 Target value area for match ON OFF Higher words Available for the transistor output type only Note When controlling the pul...

Page 1165: ...elapsed value corsses over this position when changing the speed acceleration cannot be performed A N A DT90430 Lower words A A DT90431 Elapsed value area Higher words A A DT90432 Lower words A N A DT90433 Target value area Higher words A N A DT90434 Lower words A N A DT90435 Target value area for match ON OFF Higher words Available for the transistor output type only Note When controlling the pul...

Page 1166: ...ink relays for PC PLC link 0 64 0 to 64 11 Hold type area starting word number for PC PLC link relays for PC PLC link 1 128 32k only 64 to 128 12 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers for PC PLC link 0 128 0 to 128 Hold Non hold 2 13 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers for PC PLC link 1 256 32k only 128 to 256 20 Disable or enable setting for duplicated outp...

Page 1167: ...r for link data register tranmission 0 0 to 127 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal 32k only Normal reverse PC PLC link 0 set ting 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 16 1 to 16 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 64 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 128 words 52 Starting wor...

Page 1168: ...u X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Two phase input X3 X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X5 Decremental input X5 Reset input X5 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 Incremental decrementa...

Page 1169: ...set input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and 403 Note4 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the follwing precedence order is effective High speed coun...

Page 1170: ...e serial communication PC PLC link MODBUS RTU 412 Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled 413 Communication format setting Data lenght bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by...

Page 1171: ...or CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 415 Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 416 Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 2048 0 to 32764 COM 2 port set ting 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received of general serial data communication mode 2048 0 to 2048 Note The co...

Page 1172: ...for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed R900A Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the com...

Page 1173: ...type Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control R9016 Not used R9017 Not used R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 01 sec cycles R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations...

Page 1174: ... Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Sample point flag Note Sampling by the instruction 0 Sampling at constant time intervals 1 R902D Sample trace end flag Note When the sampling operation stops 1 When the sampling operation starts 0 R902E Sampling stop trigger flag Note When the s...

Page 1175: ...communication R903A High speed counter control flag ch0 Turn on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903B High speed counter control flag ch1 Turn on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903C High speed count...

Page 1176: ...eneral purpose serial communication R9049 COM2 port transmission done flag during general purpose communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose communication R904A COM2 port SEND RECV instruction execution flag Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or n...

Page 1177: ...or occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode R9068 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode R9069 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC ...

Page 1178: ...de Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9078 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9079 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Unit No 12 Turns on when Uni...

Page 1179: ...occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode R9088 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9089 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC lin...

Page 1180: ...urns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9098 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Unit No 12 Turns on when Unit No...

Page 1181: ... A DT90003 Not used N A N A DT90004 Not used N A N A DT90005 Not used N A N A When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding to the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary display DT90006 Position of abnormal intelligent unit for FPΣ left side expansion A N A DT90007 Not used N A N A DT90008 Not used N A N A DT90009 Communication error flag for COM2 Stores the e...

Page 1182: ...nstruction A A DT90017 Operation error address hold type After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display A N A DT90018 Operation error address non hold type The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of a scan th...

Page 1183: ...mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display A N A DT90026 Not used N A N A DT90027 Periodical interrupt interval INT24 The value set by ICTL instruction is stored K0 periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s A N A DT90028 Not used N A N A DT90029 Not used N A N A DT90030 Message 0 DT90031 Message 1 DT90032 Mess...

Page 1184: ...e The value can be read or written by executing F1 DMV instruction A A DT90046 DT90047 High speed counter target value For CH0 The targe value 32 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is execut...

Page 1185: ...k Clock Calendar setting minute second DT90055 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar setting day hour DT90056 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar setting year month DT90057 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar setting day of the week The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar is stored The built in Real Time Clock Clock Calendar will operate correctly throu...

Page 1186: ...ion After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than F0 MV instruction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 are changed with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 A A DT90059 Serial com...

Page 1187: ...der process 176 to 191 DT90072 Step ladder process 192 to 207 DT90073 Step ladder process 208 to 223 DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 DT90075 Step ladder process 240 to 255 DT90076 Step ladder process 256 to 271 DT90077 Step ladder process 272 to 287 DT90078 Step ladder process 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process 304 to 319 DT90080 Step ladder process 320 to 335 DT90081 Step ladder proces...

Page 1188: ...Step ladder process 480 to 495 DT90091 Step ladder process 496 to 511 DT90092 Step ladder process 512 to 527 DT90093 Step ladder process 528 to 543 DT90094 Step ladder process 544 to 559 DT90095 Step ladder process 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder process 576 to 591 DT90097 Step ladder process 592 to 607 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit co...

Page 1189: ...90111 Step ladder process 816 to 831 DT90112 Step ladder process 832 to 847 DT90113 Step ladder process 848 to 863 DT90114 Step ladder process 864 to 879 DT90115 Step ladder process 880 to 895 DT90116 Step ladder process 896 to 911 DT90117 Step ladder process 912 to 927 DT90118 Step ladder process 928 to 943 DT90119 Step ladder process 944 to 959 DT90120 Step ladder process 960 to 975 DT90121 Step...

Page 1190: ...sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90146 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms A N A DT90148 The number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value i...

Page 1191: ...t DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 No of times underfined commands have been received DT90175 No of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have ...

Page 1192: ...instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction A N A DT90204 DT90205 High speed counter elapsed value For CH3 The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing F1 DMV instruction A A DT90206 DT90207 High speed counter target value For CH3 The target value 32 bit data of t...

Page 1193: ...System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90229 System regis ter 42 and 43 DT90230 System regis ter 44 and 45 DT90231 PLC link Unit station No 3 or 11 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90232 System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90233 System regis ter 42 and 43 DT90234 System regis ter 44 and 45 DT90235 PLC link Unit station No 4 or 12 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90236 System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90237 System regis ter 42...

Page 1194: ...stem regis ter 46 and 47 DT90248 System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90249 System regis ter 42 and 43 DT90250 System regis ter 44 and 45 DT90251 PLC link Unit sta tion No 8 or 16 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example when DT90219 is 0 A N A DT90252 Not used DT90253 No...

Page 1195: ...rea starting number for PC PLC W0 0 link registers 128 0 to 128 Hold Non hold 2 13 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC W0 1 link registers 256 128 to 256 20 Disable or enable setting for duplicated output Disabled Disabled Enabled 23 Operation setting when an I O verification error occurs Stop Stop Continuation of operation 26 Operation setting when an operation error occurs Stop Stop Contin...

Page 1196: ...al Normal reverse PC PLC link W0 0 set ting 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 16 1 to 16 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 64 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 0 to 128 words 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words 54 Starting number for link data register transmi...

Page 1197: ...h speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X4 X5 Individual input X4 X5 Incremental decremental control input X4 X5 X4 Normal input Normal input Home input of pulse output CH0 CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 X5 Normal input Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1 CH6...

Page 1198: ...set to trailing edge Note1 If CH0 CH2 CH4 and CH6 of the high speed counter is set to the two phase input individual input or incremental decremental control input the settings of CH1 CH3 CH and CH7 will be invalid Note2 Only CH0 and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high speed counter X6 for CH0 and X7 for CH2 can be allocated Note3 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse o...

Page 1199: ...Normal output Y100 Y101 Pulse output Y100 Y101 PWM output Y100 Normal output Y101 CHA Do not set input X200 as high speed counter Do not set input X200 as high speed counter Two phase input X200 X201 Two phase input X200 X201 Reset input X202 Incremental input X200 Incremental input X200 Reset input X202 Decremental input X202 Decremental input X202 Reset input X202 Incremental decremental input X...

Page 1200: ... PLS is installed in the cassette mounting part 2 Note4 If the operation mode setting for the pulse output CH0 and CH1 is carried out it cannot be used as normal output When the operation mode for the pulse output CH0 is set to 1 the reset input setting for the high speed counter CH8 and CH9 is invalid When the operation mode for the pulse output CH1 is set to 1 the reset input setting for the hig...

Page 1201: ...o not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X3 X4 CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 Two phase input X4 X5 CH6 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Two phase inp...

Page 1202: ...2 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 and 404 Note3 If system register 400 to 404 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input Example When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input X0 is specified as an i...

Page 1203: ...h even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 420 Starting address for received buffer of general serial data co...

Page 1204: ...has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 416 Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 0 0 to 32764 COM 1 port set ting 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received of general serial data communi...

Page 1205: ... 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 416 Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 2048 0 to 32764 COM 2 port set ting 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received of general serial data communication mode 2048 0 to 2048 Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bi...

Page 1206: ...434 Controller input time constant setting 3 X10 to X13 435 Controller input time constant setting 3 X14 to X17 436 Controller input time constant setting 4 X18 to X1B Cont roller input time cons tant set tings Note1 437 Controller input time constant setting 4 X1C to X1F None None 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms 128 ms 156 ms Note1 These settings are available for the FP X V2 0 or later Pho...

Page 1207: ...ld Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates the first operation error which occurred R9008 Operation error flag non hold Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 Carry flag ...

Page 1208: ...n type Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control R9016 Not used R9017 Not used R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 01 sec cycles R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operatio...

Page 1209: ...cts R902A Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Sample point flag Sampling by the instruction 0 Sampling at constant time intervals 1 R902D Sample trace end flag When the sampling operation stops 1 When the sampling operation starts 0 R902E Sampling stop trigger...

Page 1210: ...rial communication Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication R9039 COM1 port transmission done flag during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication R903A Not used R903B Not used R903C Not used R90...

Page 1211: ...sion error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction R9048 COM2 port reception done flag during general purpose communicating Turn on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication R9049 COM2 port transmission done flag during general purpose communication Goes on when transmission has been completed i...

Page 1212: ...k transmission error flag When using MEWNET W0 Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PC PLC link Turns on when there is an error in the PC PLC link area settings R9051 to R905F Not used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1213: ...ror occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9068 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9069 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC lin...

Page 1214: ... mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9078 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9079 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Unit No 12 Turns on when ...

Page 1215: ...ror occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9088 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode R9089 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC lin...

Page 1216: ... mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9098 Unit No 9 Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Unit No 12 Turns on when ...

Page 1217: ... and F167 HC1R instructions are executed Turns off when the F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions are completed R911C PLS CH0 R911D PLS CH1 R911E PLS CH2 Note2 R911F Control flag PLS CH3 Note2 Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH and F174 SP0H instructions Note1 This relay is avaialble for the FP X Ry type only Note2 This relay is available for the FP X Tr...

Page 1218: ...N A N A DT90004 Not used N A N A DT90005 Not used N A N A When an error occurs at the intelligent board for the application cassette the bit corresponding to the board will be set on DT90006 Position of abnormal application cassette A N A DT90007 Not used N A N A DT90008 Not used N A N A DT90009 Communication error flag for COM2 Stores the error contents when using COM2 port A N A When the state o...

Page 1219: ... DT90017 Operation error address hold type After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display A N A DT90018 Operation error address non hold type The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of a scan the address is 0...

Page 1220: ...instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display A N A DT90026 Not used N A N A DT90027 Periodical interrupt interval INT24 The value set by ICTL instruction is stored K0 periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s A N A DT90028 Sample trace interval K0 Sampling by the SMPL instruction K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s A N A DT90029 Not used N A N A DT90030...

Page 1221: ... can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register V0 DT90040 V1 DT90041 A N A DT90042 Volume input 2 DT90043 Volume input 3 For C60 only The potentiometer value K0 to K1000 is stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register V2 DT90042 V3 DT90043 A N A ...

Page 1222: ...T90052 High speed counter control flag A value can be written with F0 MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting N A A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1223: ...g DT90052 Pulse output control flag A value can be written with F0 MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting N A A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1224: ...7 Real Time Clock setting day of the week The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the Real Time Clock is stored The built in Real Time Clock will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time Clock can be set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 MV instruction see example for DT90058 As a day o...

Page 1225: ... the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 on At the time of coorection if between 0 and 29 s...

Page 1226: ...dder process 176 to 191 DT90072 Step ladder process 192 to 207 DT90073 Step ladder process 208 to 223 DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 DT90075 Step ladder process 240 to 255 DT90076 Step ladder process 256 to 271 DT90077 Step ladder process 272 to 287 DT90078 Step ladder process 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process 304 to 319 DT90080 Step ladder process 320 to 335 DT90081 Step ladder proce...

Page 1227: ...Step ladder process 480 to 495 DT90091 Step ladder process 496 to 511 DT90092 Step ladder process 512 to 527 DT90093 Step ladder process 528 to 543 DT90094 Step ladder process 544 to 559 DT90095 Step ladder process 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder process 576 to 591 DT90097 Step ladder process 592 to 607 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit co...

Page 1228: ...T90111 Step ladder process 816 to 831 DT90112 Step ladder process 832 to 847 DT90113 Step ladder process 848 to 863 DT90114 Step ladder process 864 to 879 DT90115 Step ladder process 880 to 895 DT90116 Step ladder process 896 to 911 DT90117 Step ladder process 912 to 927 DT90118 Step ladder process 928 to 943 DT90119 Step ladder process 944 to 959 DT90120 Step ladder process 960 to 975 DT90121 Ste...

Page 1229: ...minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms A N A DT90148 The number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90150 The minimum inerval between tw...

Page 1230: ...T90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 No of times underfined commands have been received DT90175 No of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occ...

Page 1231: ...on No 4 or 12 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90236 System regis ter 40 and 41 DT90237 System regis ter 42 and 43 DT90238 System regis ter 44 and 45 DT90239 PC PLC link Unit station No 5 or 13 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example When DT90219 is 0 When the system...

Page 1232: ...er link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example when DT90219 is 0 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left col...

Page 1233: ...te DT90310 Lower words A A Note DT90311 Target value area Higher words HSC CH2 The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A A Note DT90312 Lower words A A Note DT90313 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for input X3 of the main unit A A Note DT90314 Lower words A A Note DT90315 Target value area Higher words HSC CH3 The target value is set when instru...

Page 1234: ...28 Lower words A A Note1 DT90329 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for input X7 of the main unit A A Note1 DT90330 Lower words A A Note1 DT90331 Target value area Higher words HSC CH7 The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A A Note1 DT90332 Lower words A A Note1 DT90333 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for input X0 or X0 X1 of the ma...

Page 1235: ...ds A A Note1 DT90343 Target value area Higher words HSC CHA Note2 The target value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A A Note1 DT90344 Lower words A A Note1 DT90345 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for input X4 of the pulse I O cassette A A Note1 DT90346 Lower words A A Note1 DT90347 Target value area Higher words HSC CHB Note2 The target value is set when ...

Page 1236: ...ecuted A A Note DT90356 Lower words A A Note DT90357 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting area for the pulse I O CH2 Y4 Y5 A A Note DT90358 Lower words A A Note DT90359 Target value area Higher words PLS CH2 The target value is set when instructions F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SP0H and F175 SPSH are executed A A Note DT90360 Lower words A A Note DT90361 Elapsed value area Higher words Counting ar...

Page 1237: ...0380 PLS CH0 A N A DT90381 PLS CH1 A N A DT90382 PLS CH2 A N A DT90383 Control flag monitor area PLS CH3 When HSC control is executed by F0 MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH A N A Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SP0H and F175 SPSH ...

Page 1238: ...71 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SP0H and F175 SPSH are executed A A Note DT90356 Not used N A N A DT90357 Not used N A N A DT90358 Not used N A N A DT90359 Not used N A N A DT90360 HSC CH0 A N A DT90361 HSC CH1 A N A DT90362 HSC CH2 A N A DT90363 HSC CH3 A N A DT90364 HSC CH4 A N A DT90365 HSC CH5 A N A DT90366 HSC CH6 A N A DT90367 HSC CH7 A N A DT90368 HSC CH8 A N A DT90369 HSC CH9 A N A DT90370 HSC CHA ...

Page 1239: ...ry capacity The configuration area is reserved for future expansion FP2 16K Users memory capacity 16K words Setting range of A 2K to 16K words default value 12k Setting range of B 0 to 14K words default value 0 Setting range of C 0 to 14K words default value 0 Allocate so that A B C 16 Setting example The values of D when B C 0 A Area for sequence program 1024 x A 512 Area for file registers D 2 1...

Page 1240: ... words 26 26 111 steps 6 141 words 28 28 159 steps 4 093 words 30 30 207 steps 2 045 words 32 32 255 steps 0 word Setting example for each area When not using the machine language program area Refer to the tables for the different types given above When using the machine language program area A Area for machine language program B Area for machine language program 2 4 096 words 18 36 864 words 4 8 ...

Page 1241: ... 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes the timer Hold type area starting address system registers 6 to 13 Set each relay and register to a hold type or non hold type For normal situations set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By set...

Page 1242: ...hold type 200 words WR0 to WR199 Non hold type 500 words WR0 to WR499 Internal relay Hold type 53 words WR200 to WR252 Hold type 387 words WR500 to WR886 Data register All hold type File register All hold type Link relay for MEWNET W All hold type Link register for MEWNET W All hold type Index register All hold type Type Area FP10SH Timer All non hold type Counter All hold type Non hold type 500 w...

Page 1243: ...settings have the range for communication system register 40 41 50 and 51 set to 0 so that PC link communication is not possible If the range for sending system register 43 45 53 and 55 is set to 0 the range for communication will all be for receiving The link relay and link data register ranges not used for communication can each be used as internal relays and data registers Phone 800 894 0412 Fa...

Page 1244: ...Index register I Cleared Memory area contents setting at INITIALIZE position Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Error alarm relay E Cleared Cleared Not cleared When the initialize test switch is set to INITIALIZE position while in the PROG mode you can specify the type of memory to be cleared When the initialize test switch is set to INITIALIZE position while in the PROG mode you can specify the tyep of m...

Page 1245: ...d type area starting address setting for file registers For FP2SH bank 0 0 FP2 16K 0 to 14333 FP2 32K 0 to 30717 10 Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link relays for PC link 0 Note 0 0 to 64 11 Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link relays for PC link 1 Note 64 64 to 128 12 Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET W P link data registers for PC l...

Page 1246: ...rs Available PLC FP2SH FP2 Stop Stop continuation 22 Operation settings when an intelligent unit error occurs Stop Stop continuation 23 Operation settings when an I O verification error occurs Stop Stop continuation 24 Operation settings when a system watching dog timer error occurs Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stop Stop continuation Set the time out time for watching dog timer with system register ...

Page 1247: ...ctive time setting for monitoring 163837 5 ms 2500 to 163837 5 ms Time setting for FP2SH FP10SH 34 Constant scan time setting 0 ms Normal scan 0 to 640 ms Scans once each specified time interval Set 0 Normal scan Setting time can be obtained using the formula Set time Set value x 0 1 ms 31 Multi frame communication time settings in the computer link 6500 ms 10 0 to 8190 0 ms 32 Time out time setti...

Page 1248: ... Size of link data registers used for commu nication 0 0 to 128 words 42 Send area starting address of link relay 0 0 to 63 43 Size of link relays used for send area 0 0 to 64 words 44 Send area starting address of link data register 0 0 to 127 45 PC link 0 settings for MEWNET W P link system Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Size of link data registers used for send area 0 0...

Page 1249: ... for send area 0 0 to 64 words 54 Send area starting address of link data register 128 128 to 255 PC link 1 setting 55 PC link 1 settings for MEWNET W P link system Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Size of link data registers used for send area 0 0 to 127 words 410 Unit number setting for tool port Available PLC FP2 FP2SH 1 1 to 99 unit No 1 to 99 Tool port setting 411 Commu...

Page 1250: ...its Parity chk With odd Stop bit 1 bit End code CR Start code NO STX Character bit 7 bits 8 bits Paritch chk non with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits End code CR CR LF NON ETX Start code NO STX STX 414 Baud rate setting for the COM port Available PLC FP2 FP2SH 19200 bps 19200 bps 19200 bps 1200 bps 38400 bps 2400 bps 57600 bps 4800 bps 115200 bps 9600 bps 415 Unit number setting for COM port A...

Page 1251: ... the MC and MCE instructions the derivative output may change as follows depending on the trigger of MC instruction and input timing of DF instruction Take care regarding this point Example 1 When system register 4 sets 0 conventional Time chart 1 Time chart 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1252: ...5 164 Example 2 When system register 4 sets 1 new Time chart 1 Time chart 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1253: ...ror flag Turns on when an I O verification error occurs The slot number of the I O unit where the verification error was occurred is stored in FP3 DT9010 and DT9011 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 R9005 Backup battery error flag non hold Available PLC FP M C20 C32 FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs R9006 Backup battery error flag ho...

Page 1254: ...ns off R900E Tool port error flag Available PLC FP1 FP M FP2SH FP10SH Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred R900F Constant scan error flag Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution R9010 Always on relay Always on R9011 Always off relay Always off R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan R...

Page 1255: ...instruction flag Available PLC FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH Turns on while the single instruction execution is selected in the test RUN mode R9026 Message flag Available PLC FP M C20 C32 FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH Turns on while the F149 MSG P149 PMSG instruction is executed R9027 Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to REMOTE R9028 Break clear flag Available PLC FP2 FP2S...

Page 1256: ...145 SEND P145 PSEND and F146 RECV P146 PRECV instructions as follows off No abnormality detected on An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in FP3 DT9039 FP2 FP10SH DT90039 R9032 COM port mode flag Available PLC FP M C20C C32C FP1 C24C C40C C56C C72C FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Monitors the mode of the COM port as on Serial data communication mode off Computer link mode R9033 F14...

Page 1257: ... serial data communicating R9039 COM port send flag Available PLC FP M C20C C32C FP1 C24C C40C C56C C72C FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Turns on while data is not send during the serial data communicating Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data communicating R903A High speed counter control flag ch0 Available PLC FP M C20 C32 FP1 Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC1S to ...

Page 1258: ... LINK 1 for FP3 FP10SH When using MEWNET H link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at H link 1 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings R9056 MEWNET H link transmission error flag H LINK 2 for FP3 FP10SH When using MEWNET H link unit turns on when transmission error occurs at H link 2 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings R9057 MEWNET H link transmiss...

Page 1259: ...ink mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode R9069 Unit No 10 Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode R906A Unit No 11 Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped w...

Page 1260: ...it No 9 is in the PROG mode R9079 Unit No 10 Turns on when unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907A Unit No 11 Turns on when unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Unit No 12 Turns on when unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 12 is in the PROG mode R907C Unit No 13 Turns on when unit No 13 is in the...

Page 1261: ...link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode R9089 Unit No 10 Turns on when unit No 10 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode R908A Unit No 11 Turns on when unit No 11 is communicating properly in the PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped ...

Page 1262: ...nit No 12 is in the PROG mode R909C Unit No 13 Turns on when unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 13 is in the PROG mode R909D Unit No 14 Turns on when unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 14 is in the PROG mode R909E Unit No 15 Turns on when unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when unit No 15 is in the PROG mode R909F MEWNET W P PC link operation mode relay for...

Page 1263: ...ard access enables switch as on access enabled The access enable switch is in the on position off access disabled The access enable switch is in the off position R9105 Through R910F Note used Note The IC memory card backup battery condition can be judged using special internal relays R9101 and R9102 as follows R9101 R9102 IC memory card condition OFF OFF Not battery replacement required ON OFF Rep...

Page 1264: ...t No 16 to 31 Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9003 DT90003 Position of abnormal I O slot slot No 16 to 31 Available PLC FP2 FP2SH The slot number where an erroneous unit is installed can be monitored here 1 on is set in the bit position corresponding to the slot number when one of the errors below id detected Communication error MEWNET TR master unit When a communication error occurs at the MEWNET TR m...

Page 1265: ...to the slot of the unit will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 error 0 normal DT9014 DT90014 Auxiliary register for operation One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when F105 BSR P105 PBSR or f106 BSL P106 PBSL instruction is executed DT9015 DT90015 DT9016 DT90016 Auxiliary register for operation The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 DT90015 when F32...

Page 1266: ...f program Available PLC FP3 The last address of sequence program area set in system register 0 is stored Display of program capacity Available PLC FP10SH The program capacity is stored in decimal Example K30 approx 30 K steps K60 approx 60 K steps with memory expansion DT90020 Display of program capacity Available PLC FP2 The program capacity is stored in decimal Example K16 approx 16 K steps K158...

Page 1267: ...d minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode DT9025 Note DT90025 Note Mask condition monitoring register for interrupt unit initiated interrupts INT 0 to 15 FP2 Not used The mask conditions of interrupt unit initiated interrupts using ICTL instruciton can be monitored here Monitor using binary display 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unm...

Page 1268: ...tored here if F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD or F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instruction was executed abnormally When the instruction was successfully executed 0 is stored DT9036 DT90036 Abnormal unit display If an abnormal unit is installed to the backplane the slot number of that unit will be stored Monitor using decimal display A N A DT9037 DT90037 Work 1 for F96 SRC P96 PSRC instructions The number of data that...

Page 1269: ...ay hour DT9056 DT90056 Note Real Time Clock Clock Calendar monitor and setting year month DT9057 DT90057 Note Real Time Clock Clock Calendar monitor and setting day of the week The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the calender timer is stored The built in Real Time Clock Clock Calendar will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time ...

Page 1270: ... of DT9054 to DT9057 DT90054 to DT90057 with programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT9058 DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT9058 DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT9058 DT90058 is cleared t...

Page 1271: ...69 DT90069 Step ladder pro cess 144 to 159 DT9070 DT90070 Step ladder pro cess 160 to 175 DT9071 DT90071 Step ladder pro cess 176 to 191 DT9072 DT90072 Step ladder pro cess 192 to 207 DT9073 DT90073 Step ladder pro cess 208 to 223 DT9074 DT90074 Step ladder pro cess 224 to 239 DT9075 DT90075 Step ladder pro cess 240 to 255 DT9076 DT90076 Step ladder pro cess 256 to 271 DT9077 DT90077 Step ladder p...

Page 1272: ...9090 DT90090 Step ladder pro cess 480 to 495 DT9091 DT90091 Step ladder pro cess 496 to 511 DT9092 DT90092 Step ladder pro cess 512 to 527 DT9093 DT90093 Step ladder pro cess 528 to 543 DT9094 DT90094 Step ladder pro cess 544 to 559 DT9095 DT90095 Step ladder pro cess 560 to 575 DT9096 DT90096 Step ladder pro cess 576 to 591 DT9097 DT90097 Step ladder pro cess 592 to 607 DT9098 DT90098 Step ladder...

Page 1273: ...32 to 847 DT9113 DT90113 Step ladder pro cess 848 to 863 DT9114 DT90114 Step ladder pro cess 864 to 879 DT9115 DT90115 Step ladder pro cess 880 to 895 DT9116 DT90116 Step ladder pro cess 896 to 911 DT9117 DT90117 Step ladder pro cess 912 to 927 DT9118 DT90118 Step ladder pro cess 928 to 943 DT9119 DT90119 Step ladder pro cess 944 to 959 DT9120 DT90120 Step ladder pro cess 960 to 975 DT9121 DT90121...

Page 1274: ...s performed by each master is stored A N A DT9129 DT90129 Not used DT9130 DT90130 Not used N A N A DT9131 DT90131 MEWNET F remote I O slave stations abnormality checking for selecting the display contents and master of DT9132 to DT9135 DT90132 to DT90135 The contents displayed by DT9132 to DT9135 DT90132 to DT90135 will change depending on the contents of stored in DT9131 DT90131 Use the programmi...

Page 1275: ...the bit corresponding to that slave station number will be set to on Monitor using ibnary display 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave station MEWNET F remote I O error slave station number record when DT9131 DT90131 is H0 H1 H2 or H3 The bit corresponding to the slave station number of the MEWNET F where an error is occurring will be set to on Monitor using binary display 1 Error slave station 0 ...

Page 1276: ...ween two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9144 Note1 DT90144 Note1 The number of times the sending operation is performed counted using ring counter DT9145 Note1 DT90145 Note1 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9146 Note1 DT90146 Note1 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9147 Not...

Page 1277: ...90154 Note1 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9155 Note1 DT90155 Note1 MEWNET W P PC link status PC link 1 W P Note2 3 The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9156 Note1 DT90156 Note1 Area used for measurement of receiving interval DT9157 Note1 DT90157 Note1 MEWNET W P PC link status PC link 0 W P Note2...

Page 1278: ... unit No of link 3 DT9165 DT90165 Error flag W P link 3 Note Stores the error flag of link 3 DT9166 DT90166 Link unit no W P link 4 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the unit No of link 4 DT9167 DT90167 Error flag W P link 4 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the error flag of link 4 DT9168 DT90168 Link unit no W P link 5 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the unit No of link 5 DT9169 DT90169 Error ...

Page 1279: ...Unidentified command DT9183 DT90183 Counts how many times a parity error is detected DT9184 DT90184 End code receiving error DT9185 DT90185 Format error DT9186 DT90186 Not support error DT9187 DT90187 Self diagnostic result DT9188 DT90188 Counts how many times loop change is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9189 DT90189 Counts home many times link error is detected DT9190 DT90190 Counts how man...

Page 1280: ...ea address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here DT9201 DT90201 Test result in the optical transmission path test mode for MEWNET P link system is stored here DT9202 DT90202 Counts how many times a token is lost DT9203 DT90203 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT9204 DT90204 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT9205 DT90205 Counts how many times a s...

Page 1281: ...24 DT90224 MEWNET W P link status W P link 2 Note Loop input status Available PLC FP3 FP10SH A N A DT9225 DT90225 Not used DT9226 DT90226 Not used DT9227 DT90227 Not used DT9228 DT90228 Not used DT9229 DT90229 Not used DT9230 DT90230 Station number whre the send area address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here DT9231 DT90231 Test result in the optical transmission path t...

Page 1282: ...many times main loop break is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9251 DT90251 Counts how many times sub loop break is detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9252 DT90252 Loop reconstruction condition Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9253 DT90253 Loop operation mode Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9254 DT90254 MEWNET W P link status W P link 3 Note Loop input status Available PLC FP3 FP10SH A N A DT90255 Monito...

Page 1283: ...the 2nd program block DT90260 Type of IC memory card Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Type of IC memory card is monitored here as H5 Flash EEPROM type IC memory card H6 SRAM type IC memory card H506 For FP10SH flash EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC memory card H6 No archival information is stored H6 No data is written Other than above ERROneous condition self diagnostic error code E56 DT90261 Capacity of IC me...

Page 1284: ...the program memory is 120K steps free caqpacity of program block 2 compile memory is stored here A N A DT90267 Not used N A N A DT90268 Index register bank current value Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The current value of index register bank is stored here DT90269 Index register bank shelter number Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The shelter number of index register bank is stored here A A DT90399 Not used...

Page 1285: ...lay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90403 Third error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90404 Forth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90405 Fifth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90406 Sixth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90407 Seventh error alarm relay which went on Available PLC F...

Page 1286: ...PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90411 Eleventh error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90412 Twelth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90413 Thirteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90414 Fourteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The error alarm relay number which went on is stored To reset the specified e...

Page 1287: ...LC FP2SH FP10SH DT90417 Seventeenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90418 Eighteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90419 Nineteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The error alarm relay number which went on is stored To reset the specified error alarm relay use an RST instruction only A N A Phone 800 894 0412 Fa...

Page 1288: ...1 went on is stored DT90421 Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for day and hour data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The time day and hour data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored DT90422 Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for year and month data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The time year and month data at which the first error a...

Page 1289: ...llel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected 2 2 2 Trailing edge OR OR Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected 2 2 2 Leading edge out OT Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay 2 Trailing edge out OT Ou...

Page 1290: ...iary timer 16 bit F137 STMR After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on 5 Auxiliary timer 32 bit F183 DSTM After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on 7 Time constant processing F182 Executes the filter processing for the specified input 9 4 4 Counter CT Decrements from the preset value n 3 4 3 3 3 Available Not available Not avai...

Page 1291: ...and continues from there 3 1 Loop Label LOOP LBL The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S 4 5 3 1 Break BRK Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only 1 Available Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is ...

Page 1292: ...ctions Subroutine call CALL When the trigger is on Executes the subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained 2 3 1 Output off type subroutine call FCAL When the trigger is on Executes the subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine But the output in the subroutine is cleared 4 5 1 Subroutine entry SUB Indicates the start...

Page 1293: ...acter constant MEWTOCOL COM response control Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant High speed counter operation mode changing SYS1 Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant 13 3 3 System registers No 40 to No 47 changing SYS2 Chan...

Page 1294: ... Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 or S1 S2 5 AN Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 5 16 bit data compare AND AN Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 or S1 S2 5 OR Con...

Page 1295: ...A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 9 AND Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 9 32 bit data compare AND AND Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 ...

Page 1296: ... 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 9 1 1 ANF Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 9 1 1 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 or S1 1 ...

Page 1297: ... S2 D S1 1 S1 D 1 D S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 11 F10 P10 Block move BKMV PBKMV S1 S2 D The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to the area starting at D 7 F11 P11 Block copy COPY PCOPY S D1 D2 The data of S is transferred to the all area between D1 and D2 7 F12 Data read from EEP ROM ICRD S1 S2 D The data stored in the expansion memory of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area star...

Page 1298: ...25 P25 16 bit data subtraction P S D D S D 5 F26 P26 32 bit data subtraction D PD S D D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D 7 F27 P27 16 bit data subraction P S1 S2 D S1 S2 D 7 F28 P28 32 bit data subtraction D PD S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D 11 F30 P30 16 bit data multiplication P S1 S2 D S1 X S2 D 1 D 7 F31 P31 32 bit data multiplication D PD S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 11 F32 P32 16 bit data division ...

Page 1299: ...PDB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 11 F52 P52 4 digit BCD data division B PB S1 S2 D S1 S2 quotient D remainder DT9015 7 F53 P53 8 digit BCD data division DB PDB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 quotient D 1 D remainder DT9016 DT9015 11 F55 P55 4 digit BCD data increment B 1 PB 1 D D 1 D 3 F56 P56 8 digit BCD data increment DB 1 PDB 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 F57 P57 4 digit BCD data decrement B 1 PB 1 D...

Page 1300: ...and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 9 F71 P71 Hexadecima l data ASCII code HEXA PHEXA S1 S2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD H 42 41 44 43 B A D C 7 F72 P72 ASCII code Hexadeci mal data AHEX PAHEX S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43...

Page 1301: ...2 bit binary data DBIN PDBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D 7 F84 P84 16 bit data invert com plement of 1 INV PINV D Inverts each bit of data of D 3 F85 P85 16 bit data complement of 2 NEG PNEG D Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign 3 F86 P86 32 bit data complement of 2 DNEG PDNEG D Inverts each bit...

Page 1302: ...eft shift of multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data SHL PSHL D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left 5 F102 P102 Right shift of n bits in a 32 bit data DSHR PDSHR D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right 5 F103 P103 Left shift of n bits in a 32 bit data DSHL PDSHL D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left 5 F105 P105 Right shift...

Page 1303: ...9 data to the left 5 F125 P125 32 bit data right rotate DROR PDROR D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 5 F126 P126 32 bit data left rotate DROL PDROL D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 5 F127 P127 32 bit data right rotate with carry flag R9009 data DRC...

Page 1304: ... link unit 9 F146 P146 Data receive RECV PRECV S1 S2 N D Receives the data to another station in the network MEWNET via link unit 9 F145 P145 Data send SEND S1 S2 D N Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD bus master via COM port 9 2 F146 P146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 N D Receives the data from the slave station as the MOD bus master via COM port 9 2 F145 P145 Data send SEND S1 S2 D N Sends...

Page 1305: ...161 P161 MCU serial port reception MRCV PMRCV S D1 D2 Data is received from external equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU 7 2 2 BIN arithmetic instruction F160 P160 Double word 32 bit data square root DSQR PDSQR S D S D 7 High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FP0 FP e F0 High speed counter and Pulse output controls MV S DT9052 Performs high speed counter and Pulse output contr...

Page 1306: ...ed value of high speed counter and Pulse output DMV DT90300 D Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D 7 F165 Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter 3 F166 Target value much on with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output con...

Page 1307: ...the target position forms a straight line 5 F176 Pulse output Circular interpolation SPCH S n Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc 5 F177 Pulse output Home return HOME S n Performs the home return according to the specified data table 7 F178 Input pulse measurement No of pulses cycle for input pulses PLSM S...

Page 1308: ... channel specification HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S 11 F171 Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return SPDH S n Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S 5 F172 Pulse output with channel sp...

Page 1309: ...ration instructions F215 P215 32 bit data AND DAND PDAND S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 D 1 D 7 F216 P216 32 bit data OR DOR PDOR S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 OR S2 1 S2 D 1 D 12 F217 P217 32 bit data XOR DXOR PDXOR S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 D 1 D 12 F218 P218 32 bit data XNR DXNR PDXNR S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 D 1 D 12 F219 P219 Double word 32 bit data unites DU...

Page 1310: ...dgment results to a special internal relay 10 F258 P258 Character string coupling SADD S1 S2 D These instructions couple one character string with another 12 F259 P259 Number of characters in a character string LEN S D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string 6 F260 P260 Search for character string SSRC S1 S2 D The specified character is searched in a character s...

Page 1311: ... total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained and stored in the D 8 1 F277 P277 Sort word data 16 bit SORT PSORT S1 S2 S3 The word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first 8 1 F278 P278 Sort double word data 32 bit DS...

Page 1312: ... operation BSIN PBSIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 D 1 D 6 F301 P301 BCD type cosine operation BCOS PBCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D 6 F302 P302 BCD type tangent operation BTAN PBTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 D 1 D 6 F303 P303 BCD type arcsine operation BASIN PBASIN S D SIN 1 S1 1 S1 D 1 D 6 F304 P304 BCD type arccosine operation BACOS PBACOS S D COS 1 S1 1 S1 D 1 D 6 F305 P305 BCD type arctangent operation BATAN PBATAN S D ...

Page 1313: ...16 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion FLT PFLT S D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 6 1 1 F326 P326 32 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion DFLT PDFLT S D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 ...

Page 1314: ... real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D 8 1 1 F334 P334 Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point off FRINT PFRINT S D The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D 8 1 1 F335 P335 Floating point type data sign changes F PF S D The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed...

Page 1315: ...FMIN PFMIN S1 S2 D Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 8 F352 P352 Floating point type data total and mean values FMEAN PFMEAN S1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stor...

Page 1316: ...instructions F410 P410 Setting the index regis ter bank number SETB PSETB n Index register I0 to ID bank number change over 4 F411 P411 Changing the index regis ter bank number CHGB PCHGB n Index register I0 to ID bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number 4 F412 P412 Restoring the index regis ter bank number POPB PPOPB Changes index register I0 to ID bank number back to the ba...

Page 1317: ...tained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on ...

Page 1318: ...clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self dia...

Page 1319: ... or in an incorrect position Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions A A A A A A A A E4 Parameter mismatch error Stops An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system ...

Page 1320: ... the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately A A A A A A E8 High level instruction operand combina tion error Stops There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands A A A A A A...

Page 1321: ...y as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please contact your dealer FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit E26 User s ROM error Stops FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM ...

Page 1322: ...or Stops An abnormal unit is installed FPΣ FP0R FP0R mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one A A A A A E35 MEWNET F slave il...

Page 1323: ...d and execute the read once again A A Abnormal I O unit FPΣ FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FPΣ expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to...

Page 1324: ...eferring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A A A A A E42 I O unit verify error Selec table I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time fo power up Check the contents of special data register FP0 ...

Page 1325: ... of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 A A A E45 Operation error Selec table Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set K0 The address of operation error can be confirmed in...

Page 1326: ...set K0 A A A E47 MEW NET F attribute error Selec table In the unit on the slave station an abnormallty such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the a...

Page 1327: ...of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed A A E55 IC memory card back up battery error Cont inues The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed A A E56 Incompat ible IC memory card error Cont inues The IC memory c...

Page 1328: ...ror A different command was received when processing multiple frames 50 Link setting error A route number that does not exist was spacified Verify the route number by designating the transmission station 51 Transmission time out error Transmission to anather device not possible because transmissition buffer is congested 52 Transmit disable error Transmission processing to another device is not pos...

Page 1329: ...ormat of the address data Alsi when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation 67 No program error and No data error Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered 68 Rewrite during RUN error When inputting with programming tool software editing of an ...

Page 1330: ...te timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using the code MC or MD Preset contact area fill command SC Embeds the areaof a specified range in a 16 point on an...

Page 1331: ...0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 00000000 00010000 00000000 00010001 00000000 00010010 00000000 00010011 00000000 00010100 00000000 00010101 00000000 00010110 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0001 0000 0000 0010 0010 0000 0000 0010 00...

Page 1332: ...5 244 5 7 ASCII Codes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1333: ...5 245 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ...

Page 1334: ... 8 JUL 2005 9th edition PDF only ARCT1F313E 9 ACG M313E 9 OCT 2005 10th edition PDF only Addition New programming STF ANF ORF F145 F146 F356 Addition FPSIGMA 32K Type ARCT1F313E 10 ACG M313E 10 DEC 2005 11th edition PDF only Addition FPSIGMA 32K Type Chapter 1 8 SYS1 Chapter 4 8 4 9 4 10 ARCT1F313E 11 ACG M313E 11 JUL 2006 12th edition Addition FP X transistor type New programming F182 F252 F284 A...

Search results

Summary of Contents for FP-E

Reviews:

Panasonic FP-E, Programming Manual, Page: 239 / 1334

Search results

Summary of Contents for FP-E

Reviews: